1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
124 \notefontcolor #0000ff
128 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
133 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
141 \paragraph_separation skip
144 \math_numbering_side default
145 \quotes_style english
149 \paperpagestyle default
151 \tracking_changes true
152 \output_changes false
154 \postpone_fragile_content false
158 \docbook_table_output 0
159 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
160 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
161 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
162 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
163 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
164 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
168 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
169 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
170 \author 258250489 "eugen"
171 \author 274215730 "scott"
172 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
173 \author 1064312605 "Udi Fogiel"
174 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
175 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
186 by the \SpecialChar LyX
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
193 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
194 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
195 Documentation mailing list:
197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
199 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
211 \begin_inset Newline newline
215 \begin_inset Newline newline
219 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
221 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
225 \begin_inset Note Note
228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
229 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
230 \begin_inset Newline newline
235 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
243 \begin_layout Standard
244 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
245 LatexCommand tableofcontents
252 \begin_layout Chapter
256 \begin_layout Section
257 What is \SpecialChar LyX
261 \begin_layout Standard
263 is a document preparation system.
264 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
267 business letters and proposals,
269 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
273 It is unlike most other
274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
281 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core editing style.
282 That means that when you type a section header,
284 \begin_inset Quotes eld
288 \begin_inset Quotes erd
293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
304 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
313 takes care of the typesetting for you;
314 so you deal only with concepts,
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
324 If you haven't read it yet,
330 \begin_layout Standard
335 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
338 the format of all of the manuals.
339 If you don't read it,
340 you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
341 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
344 \begin_layout Section
349 \begin_layout Standard
350 Like most applications,
352 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its window.
353 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
354 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical scrollbar.
357 \begin_layout Standard
358 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
359 This is not a bug or an oversight,
361 When you read a book,
362 you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the next line.
363 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion,
364 hence the need for only a vertical scrollbar.
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
369 The first case is large images.
370 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen,
371 left click on the image and use the option
382 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than the \SpecialChar LyX
384 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
387 \begin_layout Standard
388 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
389 menus and toolbar buttons,
390 have a look at Appendix
395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
397 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
405 \begin_layout Section
409 \begin_layout Standard
410 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
412 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
414 Just select the manual you want to read from the
421 \begin_layout Section
422 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
424 \begin_inset CommandInset label
426 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
433 \begin_layout Standard
434 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
435 can be configured via the menu
437 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
441 \begin_inset Index idx
446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
453 is able to inspect your system to see what programs,
456 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
457 packages are available.
458 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences settings.
459 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
460 was installed on your system,
461 you might have some items that you installed locally,
463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
467 \begin_inset space \space{}
470 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
474 To force \SpecialChar LyX
475 to re-inspect your system use
477 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
481 \begin_inset Index idx
486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
487 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
493 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
494 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
497 \begin_layout Section
500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
502 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
509 \begin_layout Standard
510 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
511 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 installed but you will not be able to create PDFs
513 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
514 or print your documents
518 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
519 Some \SpecialChar LyX
520 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
529 which can produce PDFs and the like.
532 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
534 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
537 every \SpecialChar LyX
538 document can still be output as plain text
539 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
546 \begin_layout Standard
547 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
549 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
553 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required files installed,
554 but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
557 \begin_layout Standard
558 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
559 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
560 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view from the menu
562 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
570 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
573 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
577 \begin_inset Index idx
582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
583 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
591 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
598 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
602 \begin_layout Chapter
603 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
607 \begin_layout Section
608 Basic File Operations
609 \begin_inset Index idx
614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
623 \begin_layout Standard
628 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word processor as well as some more advanced operations:
631 \begin_layout Itemize
654 \begin_layout Itemize
671 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
677 \begin_layout Itemize
700 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
712 \begin_layout Itemize
714 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
726 \begin_layout Itemize
739 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
743 \begin_layout Itemize
745 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
753 \begin_layout Itemize
776 \begin_layout Itemize
789 arg "buffer-write-as"
793 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
797 \begin_layout Itemize
799 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
811 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
815 \begin_layout Itemize
817 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
825 \begin_layout Itemize
839 \begin_layout Itemize
854 \begin_layout Standard
855 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors,
856 with a few minor differences.
859 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
870 command lists the available templates.
871 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
872 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
873 and possibly propose text fragments
877 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
880 you would otherwise need to
881 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
883 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
887 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
891 They can be of use for certain classes,
892 especially those for writing letters (see section
897 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
899 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
906 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
907 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a \SpecialChar LyX
910 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
918 \begin_layout Standard
919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
952 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
953 to open a file or create a new one,
955 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
960 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
965 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
977 \begin_layout Standard
999 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
1001 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
1004 people work on the same document at the same time.
1008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1009 If you plan to do this,
1010 you should check out the Version Control feature in \SpecialChar LyX
1012 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
1017 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
1018 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
1020 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1022 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1027 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1028 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1037 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1042 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1050 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1061 \begin_inset space ~
1065 \begin_inset space ~
1070 will reload the document from disk.
1071 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document and want to restore it to the last save
1072 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1079 \begin_inset space ~
1084 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify them as your changes.
1085 \change_inserted -712698321 1676620203
1089 \begin_layout Section
1091 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622914
1092 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1094 name "sec:Safety-Nets"
1099 Rescuing Files If Things Go Awry
1102 \begin_layout Standard
1104 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623979
1106 lays much stress on safety.
1107 We know how much effort you invest in your work,
1108 and thus the last thing we want is that this work gets lost.
1110 we cannot completely prevent bad things from happening:
1112 might crash (although we put in all effort that it doesn't),
1113 you might face a power outage while you are working on a document with unsaved changes,
1114 disks might get corrupt or files might get lost or damaged during synchronization or simply because you deleted it by mistake.
1117 provides a multi-layered safety net that will hopefully prevent you from major hassles.
1118 This means that \SpecialChar LyX
1119 does not simply make a backup file,
1120 it makes several such files that might be useful in different scenarios.
1121 Parts of this multi-layered net can be switched off,
1122 if you prefer to go a bit more risky over having multiple files (see section
1123 \begin_inset space ~
1127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1129 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1134 but all measures are on by default to provide you with most possible security.
1137 \begin_layout Standard
1139 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624009
1141 we elaborate on the diverse files and when they might become useful.
1144 \begin_layout Subsection
1146 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624109
1150 \begin_layout Standard
1152 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629660
1155 makes backup copies of files when they are saved.
1157 these files are stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same file name but the extension
1162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1171 If you prefer to have all backups in a central place (and maybe on a separate disk),
1176 in preferences (see section
1177 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1183 reference "sec:Paths"
1192 then all backups are stored there.
1193 In order to prevent file name clashes,
1194 the files then do not simply have the original file name,
1195 but also the path in their name,
1197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1211 !home!paula!work!myfile.lyx~
1216 \begin_layout Standard
1218 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624464
1219 Note that some file managers hide backup files by default,
1220 and you need to enable
1221 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1228 in order to see them.
1231 \begin_layout Standard
1233 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624516
1234 Backup files provide the latest saved version of a document.
1235 They are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1237 but overwritten if new changes are saved in the original file.
1240 \begin_layout Subsection
1242 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633415
1246 \begin_layout Standard
1248 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624657
1251 also makes automatic snapshots of all opened documents that have unsaved changes in a regular time interval (which can be adjusted in preferences,
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1259 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
1264 As opposed to the backup files,
1265 these also contain unsaved changes and thus might be newer than the backups.
1268 \begin_layout Standard
1270 \change_inserted -712698321 1676624841
1271 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name,
1273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1281 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1290 Auto-save snapshots are deleted when a document is closed normally,
1292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1296 with all changes saved.
1297 They are left on disk in case of non-normal termination (e.
1298 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1302 program crash or power outage),
1303 and this is when they might become useful.
1306 \begin_layout Subsection
1308 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633419
1312 \begin_layout Standard
1314 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629567
1316 crashes and documents have unsaved changes,
1317 the program furthermore tries to write an emergency file,
1318 which is a version of the document containing all unsaved changes,
1319 even those that have been made after the latest snapshot.
1322 \begin_layout Standard
1324 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625158
1325 These files are always stored in the same directory than the original file and with the same name but the extension
1330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1336 myfile.lyx.emergency
1339 When the respective document is reopened with \SpecialChar LyX
1341 the application recognizes the emergency file and asks you whether it should try to recover your file to that last state.
1344 and if this succeeds it will ask you next whether the emergency file can be deleted.
1345 Agree on this only after you checked that everything has been correctly recovered!
1348 \begin_layout Subsection
1350 \change_inserted -712698321 1676633427
1351 Backup Files from Old \SpecialChar LyX
1355 \begin_layout Standard
1357 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625452
1358 If you open a \SpecialChar LyX
1359 document for the first time with a new major version of \SpecialChar LyX
1361 it gets converted to the new file format (allowing for new features).
1364 keeps a copy of the old version,
1367 <filename>-lyxformat-<n>.lyx
1370 where <n> is the old format (e.
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1377 myfile-lyxformat-474.lyx
1380 Those files are stored at the same location than the backup files,
1381 that is alongside the original document or,
1383 in the backup directory.
1386 \begin_layout Standard
1388 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625483
1389 As with backup files,
1390 these files are never deleted by \SpecialChar LyX
1394 \begin_layout Subsection
1396 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625510
1397 When to Use Which File?
1400 \begin_layout Standard
1402 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625539
1403 Now why all these files?
1404 Because they have different purposes.
1408 \begin_layout Standard
1410 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625820
1412 terminates unexpectedly,
1415 \begin_layout Enumerate
1417 \change_inserted -712698321 1676625790
1418 first try to restore from the emergency file (by reopening the document in \SpecialChar LyX
1420 This file has the latest changes,
1421 even changes you made after the last auto-save snapshot has been made.
1424 \begin_layout Enumerate
1426 \change_inserted -712698321 1676634256
1427 If the rescue file way did not work because there is no rescue file (e.
1428 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1432 after a power outage) or the rescue file is damaged (it might happen in mean cases that the rescue files contains just that latest addition that makes \SpecialChar LyX
1434 look if there is an auto-save snapshot.
1436 remove the trailing # so that the file can be opened with \SpecialChar LyX
1437 (not the first # in order to keep the original file until you checked the snapshot) and see if that works for you.
1439 you will have lost five minutes of work in the worst case (with the default settings at least).
1442 \begin_layout Enumerate
1444 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626178
1445 If there is no auto-save snapshot or this one is garbled as well,
1446 use the backup file.
1447 It does not have all the unsaved changes,
1448 but it might still be the most recent you can get.
1449 This is particularly the case if the original file itself got lost or is damaged.
1452 \begin_layout Standard
1454 \change_inserted -712698321 1676626301
1455 The fourth type of file,
1456 the backup file from old versions,
1457 is useful if the conversion process did not work and results in a non-working document (although we put in all efforts to prevent this) or if you mistakenly opened and saved a document with a newer version (such as a development version) and actually want to keep on using the old version.
1460 \begin_layout Standard
1462 \change_inserted -712698321 1676629641
1463 So much for the safety net.
1464 We hope you will not need it,
1466 that it catches you as high up as possible.
1467 Now let us return to the actual writing process.
1472 \begin_layout Section
1473 Basic Editing Features
1474 \begin_inset Index idx
1479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1486 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1488 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1495 \begin_layout Standard
1496 Like most modern word processors,
1498 can perform cut and paste operations on blocks of text,
1499 can move by character,
1502 and can delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1503 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1504 editing features and how to access them.
1505 We will start with cut and paste.
1508 \begin_layout Standard
1509 As you might expect,
1514 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands,
1515 along with various other editing features.
1516 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1520 \begin_layout Itemize
1526 \begin_inset Index idx
1531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1561 \begin_layout Itemize
1567 \begin_inset Index idx
1572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1602 \begin_layout Itemize
1608 \begin_inset Index idx
1613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1639 \begin_layout Itemize
1643 \begin_inset space ~
1649 \begin_layout Itemize
1653 \begin_inset space ~
1659 \begin_layout Itemize
1663 \begin_inset space ~
1667 \begin_inset space ~
1673 \begin_inset Index idx
1678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1687 \begin_inset Index idx
1692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1708 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1718 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1724 \begin_layout Standard
1725 The first three are self-explanatory.
1726 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1727 and other programs using
1749 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted) so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1754 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1755 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1756 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table,
1757 the text will be pasted into individual cells.
1761 \begin_inset space ~
1766 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1767 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list entry.
1770 \begin_layout Standard
1774 \begin_inset space ~
1779 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard contents.
1780 Possible formats include HTML,
1785 \begin_inset space ~
1792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1801 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1803 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1807 \begin_inset space \space{}
1810 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short text which is often meaningless.)
1813 \begin_layout Standard
1817 \begin_inset space ~
1820 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1822 \begin_inset space ~
1826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1830 \begin_inset space ~
1839 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1840 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection is inserted as one paragraph.
1841 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1851 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1852 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1857 \begin_inset space ~
1860 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1862 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1866 \begin_inset space ~
1874 \begin_inset space ~
1877 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1880 paste from the primary selection.
1881 This is normally the currently selected text.
1884 \begin_layout Standard
1887 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1889 \begin_inset space ~
1893 \begin_inset space ~
1901 \begin_inset space ~
1905 \begin_inset space ~
1911 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1913 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1917 Once you have found a word or expression,
1921 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1926 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1929 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1946 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1948 \begin_inset space ~
1956 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1970 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1974 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1978 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1995 arg "word-find-backward"
1998 shortcut) to search backwards
2002 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
2003 Even if you close the widget,
2013 arg "word-find-backward"
2016 will search further.
2021 \begin_layout Standard
2023 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
2028 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
2031 \begin_inset space ~
2036 field and searches the next match.
2042 \begin_inset space ~
2047 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
2049 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
2051 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
2055 \begin_layout Standard
2057 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
2059 the following options are available:
2062 \begin_layout Itemize
2065 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
2071 \begin_inset space ~
2077 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
2080 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
2081 If the toggle is set,
2083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2094 will not match the word
2095 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2108 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
2112 \begin_layout Itemize
2115 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
2119 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
2123 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
2128 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
2129 to only find complete words,
2131 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2135 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
2140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2165 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
2169 \begin_layout Itemize
2172 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
2177 will limit search and replace,
2179 to the current cursor selection.
2182 \begin_layout Itemize
2185 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
2190 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input,
2191 without pressing the
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2202 \begin_layout Itemize
2204 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
2209 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has been reached without asking.
2210 If this is not checked,
2211 a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
2212 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
2213 so you need to put it back manually.
2216 \begin_layout Standard
2217 \paragraph_spacing single
2219 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2220 The widget also has a
2224 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search widget),
2225 hiding replace and options.
2228 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
2230 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
2235 button brings you back to the full size.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2239 \paragraph_spacing single
2242 also offers an advanced
2245 \begin_inset space ~
2249 \begin_inset space ~
2254 feature that is described in section
2255 \begin_inset space ~
2259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2261 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
2269 \begin_layout Standard
2273 \begin_inset space \space{}
2277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2285 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
2286 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
2290 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
2297 \begin_layout Standard
2301 arg "inset-select-all"
2304 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
2305 When the cursor is inside an inset
2308 arg "inset-select-all"
2311 selects the content of the inset.
2315 arg "inset-select-all"
2318 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and then to the whole document.
2322 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
2325 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end of the document.
2328 \begin_layout Section
2330 \begin_inset Index idx
2335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2356 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
2363 \begin_layout Standard
2364 If you make a mistake,
2365 you can easily recover from it.
2367 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
2370 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2373 or the toolbar button
2380 If you accidentally undo too much,
2383 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2386 or the toolbar button
2393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2400 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
2401 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2404 steps to minimize memory overhead.
2407 \begin_layout Standard
2409 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
2410 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last saved,
2412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2419 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
2420 This is a consequence of the 100
2421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
2424 step undo limit mentioned above.
2427 \begin_layout Standard
2436 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
2438 However they will not undo or redo text character by character,
2439 but by blocks of text.
2442 \begin_layout Section
2444 \begin_inset Index idx
2449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2458 \begin_layout Standard
2459 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2462 \begin_layout Enumerate
2467 \begin_layout Itemize
2472 once anywhere in the edit window.
2473 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2477 \begin_layout Enumerate
2482 \begin_layout Itemize
2489 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2495 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2496 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2498 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2499 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected text.
2504 \begin_layout Itemize
2505 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2508 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2515 \begin_layout Enumerate
2523 \begin_layout Standard
2524 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2525 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2529 \begin_layout Section
2531 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2533 name "sec:Navigating"
2538 \begin_inset Index idx
2543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2552 \begin_layout Standard
2554 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2557 \begin_layout Itemize
2562 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2565 \begin_layout Itemize
2567 which is accessed either by the menu
2569 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2571 \begin_inset space ~
2576 or by the toolbar button
2579 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2585 \begin_layout Itemize
2586 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2588 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2591 and use the same menu to return to them.
2592 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2595 \begin_layout Standard
2599 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2604 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2605 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2607 \begin_inset space ~
2612 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2613 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your last editing position.
2616 \begin_layout Standard
2621 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2625 \begin_layout Subsection
2627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2629 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2634 \begin_inset Index idx
2639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2641 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2656 \begin_inset Index idx
2661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2670 \begin_layout Standard
2671 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists of tables and figures,
2673 labels and cross-references (see section
2674 \begin_inset space ~
2678 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2680 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2687 or citations (see section
2688 \begin_inset space ~
2692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2694 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2700 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your document.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2705 For example with citations,
2706 the context menu allows you to open the citation dialog and to modify the citation.
2709 \begin_layout Standard
2714 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2716 if you are displaying the list of
2718 Labels and References
2720 and wish to see only references to subsections,
2721 you can enter the text
2722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2726 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2729 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2732 \begin_layout Standard
2733 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further control the display.
2738 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2739 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2744 option keeps it in the current view state.
2745 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2746 \begin_inset space ~
2749 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2750 \begin_inset space ~
2754 the subsections of sections
2755 \begin_inset space ~
2758 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2763 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2764 \begin_inset space ~
2769 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2788 button refreshes the TOC (
2789 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2791 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2795 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2797 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2801 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2805 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2809 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2813 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2815 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2819 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2821 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2825 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2827 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2831 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2835 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2837 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2841 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2845 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2849 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2853 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2857 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2861 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2865 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2869 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2871 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2875 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections in your document.
2888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2890 you can move section
2891 \begin_inset space ~
2895 \begin_inset space ~
2898 2.4 or after section
2899 \begin_inset space ~
2904 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2917 (or the corresponding key bindings
2925 ) you can change the level of sections.
2926 You can make section
2927 \begin_inset space ~
2931 \begin_inset space ~
2935 \begin_inset space ~
2941 \begin_layout Standard
2942 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole section to copy,
2946 \begin_layout Subsection
2947 Horizontal Scrolling
2948 \begin_inset Index idx
2953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2965 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
2968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2982 \begin_layout Standard
2984 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats such as ISO
2985 \begin_inset space ~
2988 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2989 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2993 \begin_layout Standard
2994 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2998 \begin_layout Itemize
3000 is used on a small tablet computer
3003 \begin_layout Itemize
3004 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
3008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3016 \begin_inset space ~
3029 \begin_layout Itemize
3030 Math constructs with long command names
3033 \begin_layout Standard
3034 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
3035 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor is moved.
3036 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
3037 window so that table
3038 \begin_inset space ~
3042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3044 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3050 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the table.
3051 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
3054 \begin_layout Standard
3055 \begin_inset Float table
3062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
3065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3068 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
3072 Horizontal scrolling test.
3080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3082 \begin_inset Tabular
3083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
3084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
3089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3129 \begin_layout Section
3130 Input/Word Completion
3131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3133 name "sec:Input-Completion"
3138 \begin_inset Index idx
3143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3150 \begin_inset Index idx
3155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3186 \begin_layout Standard
3188 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
3189 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
3192 \begin_layout Standard
3193 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
3196 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3201 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3208 \begin_inset space ~
3212 \begin_inset space ~
3217 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
3221 \begin_inset space ~
3226 the completions are always shown in a popup.
3227 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
3230 \begin_inset space ~
3236 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
3237 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
3240 \begin_layout Standard
3242 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
3247 key to accept a proposed completion.
3248 If several completions are possible,
3249 a popup is opened showing them.
3250 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
3251 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3255 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
3265 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
3268 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
3270 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
3273 he special math option
3277 enables characters to be composed.
3279 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
3282 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
3287 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
3290 you want to insert the character
3291 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
3296 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
3299 input the characters
3300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3308 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3312 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
3314 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
3318 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
3320 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
3325 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
3327 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
3330 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
3332 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
3334 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
3337 supported character combinations can be found in the file
3342 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
3344 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
3348 's installation folder.
3350 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
3351 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
3357 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
3362 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
3363 In the example above,
3369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3402 \begin_layout Section
3404 \begin_inset Index idx
3409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 \begin_inset Index idx
3421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3423 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3438 \begin_inset Index idx
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3445 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
3448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 \begin_layout Standard
3463 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3479 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3482 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3486 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3487 \begin_inset space ~
3491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3493 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3501 \begin_layout Standard
3506 \begin_inset space ~
3515 \begin_inset space ~
3540 do exactly what you expect them to do.
3544 \begin_layout Labeling
3545 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3549 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3550 LatexCommand nomenclature
3552 description "Tabulator key"
3559 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3561 If you do not understand this,
3563 \begin_inset space ~
3567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3569 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3577 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3584 \begin_inset space ~
3588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3590 reference "subsec:Lists"
3599 If you are still confused,
3605 \begin_inset Newline newline
3613 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
3614 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
3617 \begin_layout Labeling
3618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3622 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3623 LatexCommand nomenclature
3625 description "Escape key"
3633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3642 to cancel operations.
3643 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3646 \begin_layout Labeling
3647 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3652 These move the cursor,
3654 to the beginning and end of a line,
3655 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
3658 \begin_layout Standard
3659 There are three modifier keys:
3662 \begin_layout Labeling
3663 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3681 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3682 LatexCommand nomenclature
3684 description "Control key"
3689 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
3693 \begin_layout Itemize
3703 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3706 \begin_layout Itemize
3716 it moves by words instead of characters.
3719 \begin_layout Itemize
3729 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
3734 \begin_layout Labeling
3735 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3753 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3754 LatexCommand nomenclature
3756 description "Shift key"
3761 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3764 \begin_layout Labeling
3765 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3779 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3783 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3784 LatexCommand nomenclature
3786 description "Alt or Meta key"
3791 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
3792 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3793 If you have both keys,
3794 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
3799 \begin_inset Newline newline
3802 This key does many different things,
3803 but it also activates the
3805 menu accelerator keys
3808 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
3809 it selects that menu item.
3813 \begin_layout Standard
3816 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3822 \begin_inset space ~
3826 \begin_inset space ~
3832 \begin_inset space ~
3840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3859 \begin_inset space ~
3865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3880 manual lists all other things bound to the
3888 \begin_layout Standard
3889 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3890 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
3891 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered and any existing key bindings for that action.
3893 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3894 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding it.
3895 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
3897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3912 followed by a capital
3919 \begin_layout Chapter
3922 \begin_inset Index idx
3927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Section
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
3959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3973 \begin_layout Subsection
3977 \begin_layout Standard
3978 Before you do anything else,
3979 before you ever start writing a document,
3980 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3981 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
3986 different documents use different paragraph environments,
3987 and format the title of your document differently.
3990 \begin_layout Standard
3995 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3996 By setting the document class,
3997 you automatically select these properties,
3998 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3999 If you don't choose a document class,
4001 picks one for you by default.
4002 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
4005 \begin_layout Subsection
4007 \begin_inset Index idx
4012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4029 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4031 name "sec:Document-Classes"
4038 \begin_layout Standard
4039 You can select a class using the
4041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4042 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4046 \begin_inset Index idx
4051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4053 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4068 Select the class you want to use,
4069 and make any fine tunings of the options you may need.
4072 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4076 \begin_layout Standard
4077 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
4082 \begin_layout Description
4083 Article for basic articles
4086 \begin_layout Description
4087 Report for basic reports
4090 \begin_layout Description
4091 Book for writing a book
4094 \begin_layout Description
4095 Letter for US-style letters
4098 \begin_layout Standard
4099 There are also some non-standard classes,
4100 which \SpecialChar LyX
4101 only uses if you have installed the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
4103 though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
4104 distributions will include many of these.
4105 Here are some of the classes.
4106 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
4108 Special Document Classes
4117 \begin_layout Description
4118 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
4121 \begin_layout Description
4122 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry Society
4125 \begin_layout Description
4126 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical Union
4129 \begin_layout Description
4130 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
4131 There are three article layouts available.
4132 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
4133 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
4134 All result-type statements (propositions,
4136 and so on) are sequenced together,
4139 and the like have their own sequence.
4141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4144 sequential numbering
4145 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4148 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
4149 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
4150 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
4151 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
4154 \begin_layout Description
4155 Beamer Layout for presentations
4158 \begin_layout Description
4159 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
4160 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4162 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4166 \begin_layout Description
4167 Chess Layout to write about chess games
4170 \begin_layout Description
4172 \begin_inset space ~
4175 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
4178 \begin_layout Description
4179 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
4182 \begin_layout Description
4183 Foils Used to make transparencies
4186 \begin_layout Description
4187 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
4188 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
4190 but a new one that is distributed with \SpecialChar LyX
4194 \begin_layout Description
4195 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
4198 \begin_layout Description
4199 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
4202 \begin_layout Description
4203 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
4206 \begin_layout Description
4207 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes,
4208 offers many useful features like caption formatting,
4209 automatic print space calculation etc.
4210 (Is used by this document.)
4213 \begin_layout Description
4214 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
4217 \begin_layout Description
4218 Powerdot Layout for presentations
4221 \begin_layout Description
4226 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical Society (APS),
4227 American Institute of Physics (AIP),
4228 and Optical Society of America (OSA).
4229 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
4233 \begin_layout Description
4234 Slides Used to make transparencies
4237 \begin_layout Description
4239 \begin_inset space ~
4242 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
4245 \begin_layout Description
4246 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
4249 \begin_layout Standard
4250 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes here.
4251 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
4253 Special Document Classes
4261 we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all of the document classes.
4264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4268 \begin_layout Standard
4269 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
4271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4272 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4276 \begin_inset Index idx
4281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4306 If you open a document that uses such a class,
4307 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
4308 So it may seem that something is wrong.
4311 \begin_layout Standard
4314 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
4321 are highly specialized.
4323 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
4324 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
4325 with a growing number.
4326 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
4327 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
4328 There are just too many of them.
4329 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
4332 \begin_layout Standard
4333 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
4334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4342 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
4343 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
4345 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
4348 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
4355 manual for information on how to install them.
4356 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Although \SpecialChar LyX
4364 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
4365 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
4367 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
4368 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
4369 The \SpecialChar LyX
4370 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
4373 users can write their own layout files,
4374 and many users have done so.
4377 Installing New Document Classes,
4385 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
4388 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4390 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4392 name "subsec:Modules"
4397 \begin_inset Index idx
4402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4404 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4422 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
4423 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
4424 This is not available in any document class,
4425 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
4431 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4435 \begin_inset Index idx
4440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4442 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
4460 \begin_layout Standard
4461 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
4462 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
4464 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
4465 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
4466 You can still use the module while editing your file,
4467 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
4468 since \SpecialChar LyX
4469 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4470 file without the missing prerequisites.
4471 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
4472 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
4475 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset Index idx
4484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4485 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
4492 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
4496 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4500 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4509 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
4511 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
4522 manual for more information on installing required packages.
4525 \begin_layout Standard
4526 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
4529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4535 Some modules require other modules,
4536 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
4538 will advise you about these things.
4546 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4550 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
4555 \begin_inset Index idx
4560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4562 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4579 \begin_layout Standard
4580 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
4581 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
4583 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
4584 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
4585 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
4588 a particular document has very special needs,
4589 but you need a specific inset or
4590 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
4592 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
4595 style only that one time.
4596 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
4598 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
4600 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4604 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4616 manual for information on how to use it.
4619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4623 \begin_layout Standard
4624 Each class has a default set of options.
4625 Here's a quick table describing them:
4628 \begin_layout Standard
4629 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4635 \begin_layout Standard
4637 \begin_inset Tabular
4638 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4639 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4642 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4643 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4644 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
5058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
5076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5098 \begin_layout Standard
5099 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
5105 \begin_layout Standard
5106 You're probably also wondering what
5107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5111 \begin_inset space ~
5115 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5119 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
5120 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
5126 the rest do not and begin instead with the
5131 Some document classes,
5132 such as the ones for letters,
5133 don't use any section headings.
5154 We will describe these headings fully in section
5155 \begin_inset space ~
5159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5161 reference "subsec:Headings"
5169 \begin_layout Subsection
5171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5173 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
5178 \begin_inset Index idx
5183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5185 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5200 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5207 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5224 \begin_layout Standard
5225 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
5227 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5234 \begin_inset space ~
5242 \begin_inset space ~
5248 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
5249 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
5250 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
5251 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
5252 -class and its options,
5253 you have to read its manual.
5256 \begin_layout Standard
5258 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
5262 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
5266 \begin_inset space ~
5273 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5279 \begin_inset space ~
5284 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
5285 You can choose between the following five options:
5288 \begin_layout Labeling
5289 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5294 Use default page style of current class.
5297 \begin_layout Labeling
5298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5303 No page numbers or headings.
5306 \begin_layout Labeling
5307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5315 \begin_layout Labeling
5316 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5321 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
5322 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
5323 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the maximum sectioning level of the class.
5326 \begin_layout Labeling
5327 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5332 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5338 \begin_inset Index idx
5343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5346 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5361 How they are defined is explained in section
5362 \begin_inset space ~
5366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5368 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
5376 \begin_layout Standard
5377 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
5378 \begin_inset space ~
5382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5384 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5392 \begin_layout Subsection
5393 Paper Size and Orientation
5394 \begin_inset Index idx
5399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5401 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5418 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
5425 \begin_layout Standard
5426 You can find the following options in the menu
5429 \begin_inset space ~
5436 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5440 \begin_inset Index idx
5445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5447 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5464 \begin_layout Labeling
5465 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5469 \begin_inset space ~
5474 What size paper to print on.
5479 \begin_layout Itemize
5485 \begin_layout Itemize
5491 \begin_layout Itemize
5497 \begin_layout Itemize
5503 \begin_layout Itemize
5511 \begin_layout Itemize
5517 \begin_layout Itemize
5524 \begin_layout Labeling
5525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5530 To choose whether to output as
5541 \begin_layout Labeling
5542 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
5546 \begin_inset space ~
5551 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
5552 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
5555 \begin_layout Subsection
5557 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5559 name "subsec:Margins"
5564 \begin_inset Index idx
5569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5571 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5586 \begin_inset Index idx
5591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5600 \begin_layout Standard
5601 Paper margins are set in the menu
5603 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5607 \begin_inset Index idx
5612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5614 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5631 \begin_layout Standard
5632 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
5633 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
5636 \begin_layout Subsection
5640 \begin_layout Standard
5641 If you change a document class,
5643 has to convert everything into the new class.
5644 That includes the paragraph environments.
5645 Some paragraph environments are standard,
5646 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
5647 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
5648 If this is the case,
5649 and you change the document class,
5651 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
5652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5660 The name of the style is retained,
5661 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
5662 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
5663 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
5666 \begin_layout Section
5667 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
5668 \begin_inset Index idx
5673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5675 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5692 \begin_layout Subsection
5694 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5696 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
5703 \begin_layout Standard
5704 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
5705 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
5708 \begin_layout Standard
5709 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5710 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5711 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5712 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5716 paragraph of a section,
5727 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5728 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
5730 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5733 \begin_layout Standard
5734 The space between paragraphs,
5735 like the line spacing,
5736 the space between headings and text —
5738 all the spacing for just about everything —
5739 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
5742 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5746 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
5749 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
5750 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
5755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5757 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5758 goes to produce a printable file.
5764 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5766 gives you the ability globally to change
5770 these pre-coded spacings.
5771 We will explain more later.
5774 \begin_layout Subsection
5775 Paragraph Separation
5776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5778 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5783 \begin_inset Index idx
5788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5807 \begin_layout Standard
5815 \begin_inset space ~
5823 \begin_inset space ~
5830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5834 \begin_inset Index idx
5839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5841 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5855 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
5859 \begin_layout Subsection
5863 \begin_layout Standard
5864 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5867 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5869 \begin_inset space ~
5874 dialog and toggle the
5877 \begin_inset space ~
5882 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5885 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5889 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
5890 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
5893 \begin_layout Standard
5894 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5897 \begin_layout Subsection
5899 \begin_inset Index idx
5904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5906 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5923 \begin_layout Standard
5926 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5930 \begin_inset Index idx
5935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5951 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset space ~
5963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5964 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5970 \begin_inset Index idx
5975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5978 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
5981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5992 installed to use this feature.
5997 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5999 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6001 \begin_inset space ~
6006 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
6009 \begin_layout Section
6010 Paragraph Environments
6011 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6013 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
6018 \begin_inset Index idx
6023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6025 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6040 \begin_inset Index idx
6045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6046 Paragraph environments
6054 \begin_layout Subsection
6058 \begin_layout Standard
6059 Paragraph environments correspond to the
6062 \begin_layout Standard
6071 } \SpecialChar ldots
6081 \begin_inset Newline newline
6084 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6086 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
6088 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
6089 we urge you to read the
6098 also contains many more examples than this section does.
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6102 A paragraph environment is simply a
6103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6110 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
6111 This can include a particular style of font,
6118 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6125 the different environments inside one another,
6126 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
6127 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
6128 on the fly margin adjustment,
6129 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
6130 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
6131 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
6134 \begin_layout Standard
6135 To choose a new paragraph environment,
6136 use the pull-down box
6137 \begin_inset Graphics
6138 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
6144 at the left end of the toolbar.
6146 will change the environment of the
6150 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
6151 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
6154 \begin_layout Standard
6163 create a new paragraph using the
6167 paragraph environment.
6169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6176 because if you are in one of these environments:
6179 \begin_layout Itemize
6185 \begin_layout Itemize
6191 \begin_layout Itemize
6197 \begin_layout Itemize
6203 \begin_layout Itemize
6209 \begin_layout Itemize
6215 \begin_layout Itemize
6221 \begin_layout Standard
6223 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
6228 rather than resetting it to
6233 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
6234 \begin_inset space ~
6238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6240 reference "sec:Nesting"
6248 \begin_layout Subsection
6252 \begin_layout Standard
6253 The default paragraph environment is
6258 It creates a plain paragraph.
6260 resets the paragraph environment,
6261 this is the one it chooses.
6263 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
6270 \begin_layout Standard
6271 You can nest a paragraph using the
6275 environment in just about anything else,
6276 but you can't really nest anything in a
6283 \begin_layout Subsection
6285 \begin_inset Index idx
6290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6309 \begin_layout Standard
6310 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
6311 title page has three parts:
6313 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
6314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6321 for thanks or contact information.
6322 For certain types of documents,
6324 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
6325 For other types of documents,
6327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6334 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
6337 \begin_layout Standard
6339 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
6354 Here's how you use them:
6357 \begin_layout Itemize
6358 Put the title of your document in the
6365 \begin_layout Itemize
6366 Put the author name in the
6373 \begin_layout Itemize
6374 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
6375 want to use a fixed date,
6376 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
6377 put that text in the
6382 Note that using this environment is optional.
6383 If you don't provide any,
6385 will automatically insert today's date.
6386 If you don't want a date,
6389 Suppress default date on front page
6393 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6394 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
6396 \begin_inset space ~
6404 \begin_layout Standard
6405 You can use footnotes to insert
6406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6413 or contact information.
6416 \begin_layout Subsection
6418 \begin_inset Index idx
6423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6430 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6432 name "subsec:Headings"
6439 \begin_layout Standard
6440 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
6442 takes care of the numbering for you.
6445 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6447 \begin_inset Index idx
6452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6454 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6471 \begin_layout Standard
6472 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
6476 \begin_layout Enumerate
6482 \begin_layout Enumerate
6488 \begin_layout Enumerate
6494 \begin_layout Enumerate
6500 \begin_layout Enumerate
6506 \begin_layout Enumerate
6512 \begin_layout Enumerate
6518 \begin_layout Standard
6520 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
6521 separated by periods.
6522 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
6523 Unlike the other headings,
6524 parts are numbered with
6525 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
6527 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
6529 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
6535 \begin_layout Standard
6536 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
6538 suppose you're writing a book.
6539 You group the book into chapters.
6541 does a similar grouping:
6544 \begin_layout Itemize
6549 is divided into either
6560 \begin_layout Itemize
6572 \begin_layout Itemize
6584 \begin_layout Itemize
6596 \begin_layout Itemize
6608 \begin_layout Itemize
6620 \begin_layout Standard
6621 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6630 Not all document types use the
6634 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
6639 is the top-level heading.
6647 \begin_layout Standard
6653 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
6655 labels it with its number,
6656 along with the number of the subsection,
6659 chapter that it's in.
6661 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
6662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6681 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6699 The unnumbered section headings have a
6700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6707 at the end of their name.
6708 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
6710 \begin_inset space ~
6714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6725 Changing the Numbering
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6728 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
6735 \begin_layout Standard
6736 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
6738 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
6739 that's preset in the document class.
6740 Just as certain classes start with
6755 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
6765 This is something you can change.
6768 \begin_layout Standard
6771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6775 \begin_inset Index idx
6780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6782 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6799 \begin_inset space ~
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6808 you will see two counters.
6813 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
6814 numbers a section heading.
6815 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
6818 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6819 Short Titles of Headings
6820 \begin_inset Index idx
6825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6827 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
6830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6842 \begin_inset Argument 1
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6854 name "sec:Short-Titles"
6861 \begin_layout Standard
6862 Some section or chapter titles,
6865 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
6867 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
6868 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
6871 \begin_layout Standard
6873 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6874 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6875 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6876 To specify a short title,
6877 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6879 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6881 \begin_inset space ~
6887 This will insert a box labeled
6888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6892 \begin_inset space ~
6896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6899 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6900 This also works for captions inside floats.
6901 There can only be one short title per title.
6904 \begin_layout Standard
6905 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6908 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6912 \begin_layout Standard
6913 The following information applies to all section headings:
6916 \begin_layout Itemize
6917 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6920 \begin_layout Itemize
6921 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6924 \begin_layout Itemize
6925 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6928 \begin_layout Itemize
6929 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6932 \begin_layout Subsection
6936 \begin_layout Standard
6938 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6954 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6955 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6956 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
6957 They also allow nesting,
6967 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6970 \begin_layout Standard
6971 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
6980 when you start a new paragraph.
6982 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6986 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6989 once you are done typing in that poem,
6990 you have to change back to the
6994 environment yourself.
6997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7006 \begin_inset Index idx
7011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7020 \begin_layout Standard
7021 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
7022 it's time for the differences.
7031 are identical except for one difference:
7036 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
7045 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
7048 \begin_layout Standard
7049 Here's an example of the
7063 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
7064 See – no indentation!
7068 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
7070 there's no indentation,
7071 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7075 Here's another example,
7083 \begin_layout Quotation
7090 you will see the indentation.
7091 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
7096 is the environment for you!
7102 you were quoting other text.
7105 \begin_layout Quotation
7106 Here's a new paragraph.
7107 I could ramble on and on,
7108 like a politician at election time.
7114 \begin_layout Standard
7115 As the examples show,
7120 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
7121 They should put quotes in the
7126 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
7130 paragraph environment for quoted text.
7133 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7135 \begin_inset Index idx
7140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7142 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_inset Index idx
7162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7178 \begin_layout Standard
7183 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
7192 \begin_inset Newline newline
7195 Which I did not rehearse!
7199 It could be much worse.
7200 This line could be long,
7203 so very long that it wraps around.
7204 It looks okay on screen,
7205 but in the printed version,
7206 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
7208 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
7214 \begin_inset Newline newline
7217 And make things look fine
7218 \begin_inset Newline newline
7224 arg "newline-insert newline"
7230 \begin_layout Standard
7236 does not indent both margins.
7237 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
7238 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
7242 arg "newline-insert newline"
7248 \begin_layout Subsection
7250 \begin_inset Index idx
7255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7271 \begin_layout Standard
7273 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
7284 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
7296 lets you provide your own label.
7297 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
7300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7304 \begin_layout Standard
7305 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
7308 treats each paragraph as a list item.
7317 reset the environment to
7321 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
7322 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
7323 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
7327 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
7331 If you do this at the top level of a list,
7332 it returns you to the
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
7343 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
7344 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
7345 we suggest you read all of section
7346 \begin_inset space ~
7350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7352 reference "sec:Nesting"
7360 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7362 \begin_inset Index idx
7367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7384 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7393 \begin_layout Standard
7394 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
7398 paragraph environment.
7399 It has the following properties:
7402 \begin_layout Itemize
7403 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
7407 \begin_layout Itemize
7409 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
7412 \begin_layout Itemize
7413 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
7417 \begin_layout Itemize
7418 The items can have any length.
7420 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
7421 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
7428 \begin_layout Itemize
7433 environment inside another
7438 the label changes to a new symbol.
7442 \begin_layout Itemize
7443 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
7446 \begin_layout Itemize
7448 always shows the same symbol on screen.
7451 \begin_layout Itemize
7453 \begin_inset space ~
7457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7459 reference "sec:Nesting"
7464 for a full explanation of nesting.
7468 \begin_layout Standard
7470 that explanation was also an example of an
7479 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
7482 \begin_layout Standard
7483 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
7484 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
7487 \begin_layout Itemize
7488 The label for the first level
7492 is a large black dot,
7497 \begin_layout Itemize
7498 The label for the second level is a dash.
7502 \begin_layout Itemize
7503 The label for the third is an asterisk.
7507 \begin_layout Itemize
7508 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
7512 \begin_layout Itemize
7513 Back out to the third level.
7517 \begin_layout Itemize
7518 Back to the second level.
7522 \begin_layout Itemize
7523 Back to the outermost level.
7526 \begin_layout Standard
7527 These are the default labels for an
7532 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
7534 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
7537 dialog in the submenu
7542 \begin_inset Index idx
7547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7549 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7563 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
7567 \begin_layout Standard
7568 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
7569 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7576 reference "sec:Nesting"
7584 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7586 \begin_inset Index idx
7591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7593 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7610 name "sec:Enumerate"
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7622 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
7623 It has these properties:
7626 \begin_layout Enumerate
7627 Each item has a numeral as its label.
7631 \begin_layout Enumerate
7632 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
7636 \begin_layout Enumerate
7638 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
7641 \begin_layout Enumerate
7646 environment resets the counter to one.
7649 \begin_layout Enumerate
7663 \begin_layout Enumerate
7664 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
7665 Items can have any length.
7668 \begin_layout Enumerate
7669 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
7672 \begin_layout Enumerate
7673 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
7676 \begin_layout Enumerate
7677 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
7681 \begin_layout Standard
7691 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
7693 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
7694 labels the four different levels in an
7701 \begin_layout Enumerate
7702 The first level of an
7706 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
7710 \begin_layout Enumerate
7711 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
7715 \begin_layout Enumerate
7716 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
7720 \begin_layout Enumerate
7721 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
7724 \begin_layout Enumerate
7726 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate
7731 Back to the third level
7735 \begin_layout Enumerate
7736 Back to the second level.
7740 \begin_layout Enumerate
7741 Back to the outermost level.
7744 \begin_layout Standard
7745 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
7751 \begin_inset space ~
7755 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7757 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7763 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
7764 not in \SpecialChar LyX
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 There is more to nesting
7773 environments than we've stated here.
7774 You should read section
7775 \begin_inset space ~
7779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7781 reference "sec:Nesting"
7786 to learn more about nesting.
7789 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7791 \begin_inset Index idx
7796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7815 \begin_layout Standard
7816 Unlike the previous two environments,
7821 list has no fixed label.
7825 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7832 of the first line as the label.
7836 \begin_layout Description
7838 This is an example of the
7845 \begin_layout Standard
7847 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
7850 \begin_layout Standard
7852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7859 it is meant that the first usage of the
7863 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
7864 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
7865 \change_deleted 177693 1654619261
7869 \change_inserted 177693 1654619261
7878 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
7883 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7884 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7886 \change_deleted 177693 1654619271
7888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619271
7892 \begin_inset space ~
7899 \begin_inset space ~
7903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7905 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
7910 for more information.) Here is an example:
7913 \begin_layout Description
7915 \begin_inset space ~
7919 This one shows how to use a
7920 \change_deleted 177693 1654619281
7924 \change_inserted 177693 1654619281
7928 \begin_inset space ~
7940 \begin_layout Description
7946 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
7947 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
7948 It's not a good idea to use a
7952 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
7953 You're better off using
7965 paragraphs into them.
7968 \begin_layout Description
7974 environments inside one another,
7975 nest them in other types of lists,
7979 \begin_layout Standard
7980 Notice that after the first line,
7982 indents subsequent lines,
7983 offsetting them from the first line.
7986 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7988 \begin_inset Index idx
7993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7995 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
7998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8012 \begin_layout Standard
8017 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8018 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
8022 \begin_layout Standard
8031 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
8032 Here are its properties:
8035 \begin_layout Labeling
8036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8038 \begin_inset space ~
8041 labels \SpecialChar LyX
8043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8050 of each line as the item label.
8055 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
8056 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
8058 \change_deleted 177693 1654619285
8060 \change_inserted 177693 1654619287
8063 space as described above.
8066 \begin_layout Labeling
8067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8068 margins As you can see,
8070 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
8071 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
8072 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
8075 \begin_layout Labeling
8076 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8078 \begin_inset space ~
8081 width \SpecialChar LyX
8082 uses the width of the label,
8083 or the default width,
8085 If the label width is larger,
8087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8094 into the first line.
8096 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
8099 \begin_layout Labeling
8100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8102 \begin_inset space ~
8105 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
8109 environment has the same left margin.
8110 \begin_inset Newline newline
8113 To change the default width,
8114 select all items in the list.
8117 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8119 \begin_inset space ~
8124 dialog (toolbar button
8127 arg "layout-paragraph"
8134 \begin_inset space ~
8139 determines the default label width.
8140 You can use the text of your largest label here,
8141 but you can also use the letter
8142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8149 multiple times instead.
8150 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
8153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8160 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
8163 \begin_inset space ~
8168 every time you alter a label in a
8173 \begin_inset Newline newline
8176 The predefined default width is the length of
8177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8185 \begin_inset space ~
8191 \begin_layout Standard
8196 list the same way as the
8201 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
8206 environment gives you another way to do this,
8207 using a different overall layout.
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8215 lists inside one another,
8216 nest them in other types of lists,
8218 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
8220 \begin_inset space ~
8224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8226 reference "sec:Nesting"
8231 to learn about nesting.
8234 \begin_layout Standard
8235 There is yet another feature of the
8240 As you can see in the examples,
8242 left-justifies the item labels by default.
8243 You can use additional
8246 \change_inserted 177693 1654621595
8251 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
8252 justifies the item label.
8256 \change_inserted 177693 1654621600
8258 \change_deleted 177693 1654621601
8260 \change_inserted 177693 1654621603
8265 are documented in section
8266 \begin_inset space ~
8270 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8272 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
8278 Here are some examples:
8281 \begin_layout Labeling
8282 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8283 Left The default for
8290 \begin_layout Labeling
8291 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8292 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8298 \change_inserted 177693 1654621610
8303 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
8306 \begin_layout Labeling
8307 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
8308 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8312 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
8318 \change_inserted 177693 1654621617
8323 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
8326 \begin_layout Subsection
8328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8330 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
8335 \begin_inset Index idx
8340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8342 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8360 The features described in this section require that the module
8362 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
8364 is loaded in the document settings.
8365 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8371 \begin_inset Index idx
8376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8379 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8397 Custom Enumerate Lists
8398 \begin_inset Index idx
8403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8405 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8415 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8432 \begin_layout Standard
8434 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
8436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8439 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
8440 There you add the command
8443 \begin_layout Standard
8451 \begin_layout Standard
8463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8464 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
8467 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8473 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
8487 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
8494 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
8495 For capital Roman numerals replace
8507 in the command above.
8508 For Arabic numerals use
8516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8523 items with capital or small Latin letters use
8539 \begin_layout Standard
8541 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8550 You can only number 26
8551 \begin_inset space ~
8554 items with Latin letters,
8555 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
8563 \begin_layout Standard
8564 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
8565 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
8571 \begin_layout Standard
8572 Here is a list with custom numbering:
8575 \begin_layout Enumerate
8576 \begin_inset Argument 1
8579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8605 \begin_layout Enumerate
8606 \begin_inset Argument 1
8609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8632 \begin_layout Enumerate
8637 \begin_layout Enumerate
8638 \begin_inset Argument 1
8641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8665 \begin_layout Enumerate
8666 \begin_inset Argument 1
8669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8695 \begin_layout Standard
8696 For this list these commands were used:
8699 \begin_layout Standard
8710 \begin_inset Newline newline
8718 \begin_inset Newline newline
8726 \begin_inset Newline newline
8736 \begin_layout Standard
8743 makes the label emphasized and
8752 \begin_layout Standard
8753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8762 When you change the label of a list level,
8763 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
8771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8773 \begin_inset Index idx
8778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8780 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8807 \begin_layout Standard
8808 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
8811 \begin_layout Enumerate
8812 \begin_inset Argument 1
8815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8834 \begin_inset Note Note
8837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8838 goes back to default numbering
8846 \begin_layout Enumerate
8850 \begin_layout Standard
8854 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
8858 \begin_layout Standard
8859 To resume an enumeration,
8866 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
8867 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
8868 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
8875 \begin_layout Standard
8876 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8885 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
8886 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
8895 \begin_layout Standard
8896 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
8897 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
8898 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
8903 \begin_layout Standard
8909 \begin_layout Standard
8914 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
8918 \begin_layout Enumerate
8922 \begin_layout Enumerate
8926 \begin_layout Standard
8927 Enumeration starting at a given value:
8930 \begin_layout Enumerate
8931 \begin_inset Argument 1
8934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8950 This enumeration starts at 4
8953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8955 \begin_inset Index idx
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8962 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
8965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8979 \begin_layout Standard
8980 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
8981 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
8984 \begin_layout Itemize
8988 \begin_layout Itemize
8989 with standard spacing
8992 \begin_layout Standard
8993 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
8994 Add there the command
8998 to get no additional list space like in this example:
9001 \begin_layout Itemize
9002 \begin_inset Argument 1
9005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9024 \begin_layout Itemize
9028 \begin_layout Itemize
9032 \begin_layout Standard
9033 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9039 \begin_inset Index idx
9044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9047 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9062 For more information see its documentation,
9064 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9074 \begin_layout Standard
9075 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
9076 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
9077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9080 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
9083 \begin_layout Enumerate
9084 \begin_inset Argument 1
9087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9109 \begin_layout Enumerate
9110 with negative indentation
9113 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9114 Further Customization
9115 \begin_inset Index idx
9120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9139 \begin_layout Standard
9140 You can also change the style of description lists.
9144 \begin_layout Standard
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9151 changes the description label font,
9155 \begin_layout Standard
9161 \begin_layout Standard
9162 sets the list style.
9165 \begin_layout Standard
9166 An example where the command
9169 \begin_layout Standard
9178 \begin_layout Standard
9182 \begin_layout Description
9184 \begin_inset space ~
9189 \begin_inset Argument 1
9192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9213 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
9214 therefore ionizing them.
9217 \begin_layout Description
9219 \begin_inset space ~
9223 In computer science,
9224 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
9226 or handles to a resource such as an object,
9228 disk space or other resource.
9231 \begin_layout Standard
9232 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
9238 \begin_inset Index idx
9243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9246 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
9249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9261 For more information see its documentation
9262 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
9272 \begin_layout Subsection
9274 \begin_inset Index idx
9279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9288 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9290 \begin_inset space ~
9297 \begin_layout Standard
9298 Although \SpecialChar LyX
9299 has document classes for letters,
9300 we've also created two paragraph environments called
9307 \begin_inset space ~
9313 To use the letter class,
9314 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
9315 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
9316 gags on the document.
9325 \begin_inset space ~
9330 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
9331 You can even nest them inside other environments,
9332 though you can't nest anything in them.
9335 \begin_layout Standard
9337 you're not limited to using
9344 \begin_inset space ~
9353 \begin_inset space ~
9360 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
9363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9365 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9367 name "sec:Address-Usage"
9374 \begin_layout Standard
9379 environment formats text in the style of an address,
9380 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
9385 \begin_inset space ~
9390 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
9391 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
9392 Here's an example of each:
9395 \begin_layout Right Address
9397 \begin_inset Newline newline
9401 \begin_inset Newline newline
9405 \begin_inset Newline newline
9412 \begin_layout Standard
9416 \begin_inset space ~
9422 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
9423 which \SpecialChar LyX
9424 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
9425 Here's an example of the
9432 \begin_layout Address
9434 \begin_inset Newline newline
9437 Where do I send this
9438 \begin_inset Newline newline
9441 Your post office and country
9444 \begin_layout Standard
9453 \begin_inset space ~
9458 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
9463 in either of these environments,
9465 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
9480 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
9489 arg "newline-insert newline"
9494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
9495 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
9497 \begin_inset space ~
9501 \begin_inset space ~
9506 ) to start a new line in an
9513 \begin_inset space ~
9521 \begin_layout Subsection
9525 \begin_layout Standard
9526 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
9528 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
9531 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9533 \begin_inset Index idx
9538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9547 \begin_layout Standard
9552 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
9554 you could use this environment anywhere,
9555 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
9558 don't bother trying to nest
9562 in anything else or vice versa.
9568 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
9569 The book document classes ignores the
9574 and it's utterly silly to use
9578 in a letter document class.
9581 \begin_layout Standard
9586 environment does several things for you.
9588 it puts the centered label
9589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9597 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
9599 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
9600 just as you'd expect.
9602 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
9604 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
9606 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
9609 \begin_layout Standard
9610 Starting a new paragraph by entering
9614 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9615 The new paragraph will still be in the
9621 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
9624 \begin_layout Standard
9625 \begin_inset Float figure
9632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9634 \begin_inset Graphics
9635 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
9642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9643 \begin_inset Caption Standard
9645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9648 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9669 \begin_layout Standard
9670 We would love to demonstrate the
9675 but since this document is in the
9676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9685 We inserted it therefore as figure
9686 \begin_inset space ~
9690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9692 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
9698 If you have never heard of an
9699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9707 you can safely ignore this environment.
9710 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9712 \begin_inset Index idx
9717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9726 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
9733 \begin_layout Standard
9738 environment is used to list references.
9740 you could use this environment anywhere,
9741 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
9753 \begin_layout Standard
9754 When you first open a
9760 adds a large vertical space,
9761 followed by the heading
9762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9777 depending on the document class.
9778 The heading is in a large boldface font.
9779 Each paragraph of the
9783 environment is a bibliography entry.
9789 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9790 Each new paragraph is still in the
9797 \begin_layout Standard
9799 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
9801 For more information on that,
9802 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
9803 's bibliography handling,
9804 have a look at section
9805 \begin_inset space ~
9809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9811 reference "sec:Bibliography"
9819 \begin_layout Subsection
9820 Special Environments
9823 \begin_layout Standard
9825 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
9828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9833 \begin_inset Index idx
9838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9846 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9848 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
9855 \begin_layout Standard
9861 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
9863 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
9868 key as a fixed whitespace.
9872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9884 \change_deleted 177693 1654619837
9888 \change_inserted 177693 1654619839
9892 \begin_inset space ~
9896 \change_deleted 177693 1654619842
9898 \change_inserted 177693 1654619844
9903 instead of an end-of-word marker.
9922 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
9924 If you need to insert blank lines,
9925 you will still need to use
9928 arg "newline-insert newline"
9947 does not reset the paragraph environment.
9949 when you finish using the
9955 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
9962 environment inside of others.
9965 \begin_layout Standard
9966 There are a few quirks with this environment:
9969 \begin_layout Itemize
9973 arg "newline-insert newline"
9976 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
9977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
9981 \begin_inset space \space{}
9991 arg "newline-insert newline"
9997 \begin_layout Itemize
10001 arg "newline-insert newline"
10011 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10017 \begin_layout Itemize
10018 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
10019 You must put at least one
10023 in any line you want blank.
10029 \begin_layout Itemize
10030 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
10034 since that will insert
10039 You get the typewriter double quotes with
10042 arg "self-insert \""
10048 \begin_layout Standard
10049 Here is an example:
10052 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10056 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10060 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10064 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10068 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10069 printf("Hello World!
10074 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10078 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10082 \begin_layout Standard
10083 This is just the standard
10084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10094 \begin_layout Standard
10102 such as program source,
10103 shell scripts and so on.
10104 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter.
10105 \begin_inset Index idx
10110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10111 Paragraph environments
10116 For longer parts of programming code,
10117 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
10119 Program Code Listings
10124 \begin_inset space ~
10132 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10136 \begin_inset Index idx
10141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10150 \begin_layout Standard
10155 environment is similar to the
10160 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
10165 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
10179 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a
10180 \change_deleted 177693 1654619849
10182 \change_inserted 177693 1654619851
10185 space) and you can have empty lines.
10199 \begin_layout Itemize
10200 have a certain language and a text style
10203 \begin_layout Itemize
10204 contain hyperlinks,
10206 foot- and margin notes,
10210 index- and nomenclature entries,
10215 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
10219 \begin_layout Standard
10220 Because of these properties
10224 works like a typewriter.
10225 Here is an example:
10228 \begin_layout Verbatim
10233 \begin_layout Verbatim
10237 The following 2 lines are empty:
10240 \begin_layout Verbatim
10244 \begin_layout Verbatim
10248 \begin_layout Verbatim
10250 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
10255 \begin_layout Standard
10260 environment is identical to
10264 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
10265 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
10272 \begin_layout Verbatim*
10277 \begin_layout Section
10278 Nesting Environments
10279 \begin_inset Index idx
10284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10286 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10310 \begin_layout Subsection
10314 \begin_layout Standard
10316 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
10317 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
10318 For example you have three main points in an outline,
10319 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
10321 you have a list inside of another list,
10322 with the inner list
10323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10333 \begin_layout Enumerate
10337 \begin_layout Enumerate
10342 \begin_layout Enumerate
10346 \begin_layout Enumerate
10351 \begin_layout Enumerate
10355 \begin_layout Standard
10356 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
10357 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
10360 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10362 \begin_inset space ~
10366 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_inset space ~
10378 \begin_inset space ~
10383 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
10384 Instead of the menu,
10385 you can also use the toolbar buttons
10388 arg "depth-increment"
10394 arg "depth-decrement"
10397 or the key bindings
10408 arg "depth-increment"
10414 arg "depth-decrement"
10418 The change will work on the current selection,
10419 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
10420 or the current paragraph.
10423 \begin_layout Standard
10424 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
10425 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
10426 If it is invalid to do so,
10427 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
10429 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
10430 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
10433 \begin_layout Standard
10434 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
10435 In \SpecialChar LyX
10437 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
10438 as you're about to find out.
10439 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
10442 \begin_layout Subsection
10443 What You Can and Can't Nest
10446 \begin_layout Standard
10447 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
10448 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
10451 \begin_layout Standard
10452 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
10453 There are three types of paragraph environments:
10456 \begin_layout Itemize
10457 Completely unnestable
10460 \begin_layout Itemize
10462 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
10465 \begin_layout Itemize
10467 you can nest them into other environments,
10468 but you can't nest anything into them.
10471 \begin_layout Standard
10472 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
10473 and which paragraph environments have them:
10476 \begin_layout Description
10477 Unnestable Can't nest them.
10478 Can't nest into them.
10482 \begin_layout Itemize
10488 \begin_layout Itemize
10494 \begin_layout Itemize
10500 \begin_layout Itemize
10506 \begin_layout Itemize
10513 \begin_layout Description
10515 \begin_inset space ~
10518 Nestable You can nest them.
10519 You can nest other things into them.
10523 \begin_layout Itemize
10529 \begin_layout Itemize
10535 \begin_layout Itemize
10541 \begin_layout Itemize
10547 \begin_layout Itemize
10553 \begin_layout Itemize
10559 \begin_layout Itemize
10565 \begin_layout Itemize
10572 \begin_layout Itemize
10578 \begin_layout Itemize
10585 \begin_layout Description
10586 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
10587 You can't nest anything into them.
10591 \begin_layout Itemize
10597 \begin_layout Itemize
10603 \begin_layout Itemize
10609 \begin_layout Itemize
10615 \begin_layout Itemize
10621 \begin_layout Itemize
10627 \begin_layout Itemize
10633 \begin_layout Itemize
10639 \begin_layout Itemize
10645 \begin_layout Itemize
10651 \begin_layout Itemize
10657 \begin_layout Itemize
10663 \begin_layout Itemize
10669 \begin_layout Itemize
10673 \begin_inset space ~
10679 \begin_layout Itemize
10686 \begin_layout Standard
10687 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10696 Although it is possible,
10698 to nest numbered section headings like
10709 \begin_inset space ~
10713 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
10721 \begin_layout Subsection
10722 Nesting Other Things:
10727 \begin_inset Index idx
10732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10734 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
10737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10751 \begin_layout Standard
10752 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
10753 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
10757 \begin_layout Itemize
10761 \begin_layout Itemize
10765 \begin_layout Itemize
10769 \begin_layout Standard
10771 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
10774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10780 Figures and tables in
10784 are not affected by this.
10789 Have a look at section
10790 \begin_inset space ~
10794 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10796 reference "sec:Floats"
10801 for more information about
10808 \begin_layout Standard
10810 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
10813 or an equation is inline,
10814 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
10817 \begin_layout Standard
10819 if you have an equation,
10820 figure or table in a
10821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10829 it behaves just like a
10830 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10837 paragraph environment.
10838 You can nest it into any environment,
10839 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
10842 \begin_layout Standard
10843 Here's an example with a table:
10846 \begin_layout Enumerate
10851 \begin_layout Enumerate
10852 This is (a) and it's nested.
10856 \begin_layout Standard
10857 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10863 \begin_layout Standard
10865 \begin_inset Tabular
10866 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10867 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10868 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10869 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
10930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10953 \begin_layout Standard
10954 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10961 \begin_layout Enumerate
10963 The table is actually nested inside (a).
10967 \begin_layout Enumerate
10971 \begin_layout Standard
10972 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
10973 the list would look like this:
10976 \begin_layout Enumerate
10981 \begin_layout Enumerate
10982 This is (a) and it's nested.
10986 \begin_layout Standard
10987 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10993 \begin_layout Standard
10995 \begin_inset Tabular
10996 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10997 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10998 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10999 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11083 \begin_layout Standard
11084 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11090 \begin_layout Enumerate
11098 it's not nested at all.
11101 \begin_layout Enumerate
11105 \begin_layout Standard
11106 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
11107 but is also the first item of a new list!
11110 \begin_layout Standard
11111 There's another trap you can fall into:
11113 but not going deep enough.
11115 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
11118 \begin_layout Enumerate
11123 \begin_layout Enumerate
11124 This is (a) and it's nested.
11127 \begin_layout Standard
11128 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11134 \begin_layout Standard
11136 \begin_inset Tabular
11137 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
11138 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11139 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11140 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
11142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11225 \begin_layout Standard
11226 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
11232 \begin_layout Enumerate
11234 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
11242 \begin_layout Enumerate
11246 \begin_layout Standard
11248 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
11254 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
11256 if you nest tables,
11257 figures or equations,
11258 make sure you go to the right depth!
11261 \begin_layout Subsection
11262 Usage and General Features
11265 \begin_layout Standard
11266 Speaking of levels,
11268 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
11271 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11275 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11278 is the innermost possible depth.
11279 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
11282 \begin_layout Enumerate
11283 level #1 – outermost
11287 \begin_layout Enumerate
11292 \begin_layout Enumerate
11297 \begin_layout Enumerate
11302 \begin_layout Itemize
11307 \begin_layout Itemize
11316 \begin_layout Standard
11317 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
11318 and you can see both of them in the example.
11319 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
11320 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
11330 if we tried to nest another
11335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11343 we would get errors.
11346 \begin_layout Subsection
11348 \begin_inset Index idx
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11355 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
11358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11372 \begin_layout Standard
11373 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
11374 We have several examples of nested environments.
11376 we explain how we created the example,
11377 so that you can reproduce them.
11380 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11382 The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
11385 \begin_layout Labeling
11386 \labelwidthstring MMM
11387 #1-a This is the outermost level.
11396 \begin_layout Labeling
11397 \labelwidthstring MMM
11398 #2-a This is level #2.
11399 We created it by using
11402 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11408 arg "depth-increment"
11415 \begin_layout Labeling
11416 \labelwidthstring MMM
11417 #3-a This is level #3.
11427 arg "depth-increment"
11431 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
11435 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11441 arg "depth-increment"
11448 \begin_layout Standard
11455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11465 We did this by entering
11468 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11475 arg "depth-increment"
11479 then changing the paragraph environment to
11484 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
11485 it also works for the
11502 \begin_layout Standard
11512 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11518 \begin_layout Labeling
11519 \labelwidthstring MMM
11520 #4-a This is level #4.
11524 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11527 and changed the paragraph environment back to
11533 we can't nest anything inside a
11538 which is why we're still at level #4.
11544 keep nesting things inside
11545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11556 \begin_layout Labeling
11557 \labelwidthstring MMM
11558 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
11563 \begin_layout Labeling
11564 \labelwidthstring MMM
11565 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
11566 and this is level #6.
11568 you should know how we made these two.
11572 \begin_layout Labeling
11573 \labelwidthstring MMM
11574 #5-b Back to level #5.
11578 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11584 arg "depth-decrement"
11591 \begin_layout Labeling
11592 \labelwidthstring MMM
11596 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11602 arg "depth-decrement"
11606 we're back at level #4.
11610 \begin_layout Labeling
11611 \labelwidthstring MMM
11612 #3-b Back to level #3.
11613 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
11617 \begin_layout Labeling
11618 \labelwidthstring MMM
11619 #2-b Back to level #2.
11623 \begin_layout Labeling
11624 \labelwidthstring MMM
11626 back to the outermost level,
11628 After this sentence,
11633 and change the paragraph environment back to
11640 \begin_layout Standard
11641 We could have also used the
11660 environment in place of the
11665 The example would have worked exactly the same.
11668 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11673 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11674 This is the LyX-Code environment,
11679 \begin_layout LyX-Code
11689 arg "depth-increment"
11694 \begin_inset Newline newline
11698 we will change to the
11706 \begin_layout Enumerate
11715 \begin_layout Enumerate
11716 Notice how the nested
11720 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
11725 but also inherits its font and spacing!
11729 \begin_layout Standard
11730 We ended this example by entering
11736 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
11740 and reset the nesting depth by using
11743 arg "depth-decrement"
11749 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11762 \begin_inset Argument 1
11765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11768 Levels and other list environments
11776 \begin_layout Enumerate
11782 paragraph environment.
11783 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
11787 \begin_layout Enumerate
11792 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11798 arg "depth-increment"
11803 what happens if we nest an
11807 environment inside of this one?
11808 It will be at level #3,
11809 but what will its label be?
11814 \begin_layout Itemize
11826 even though it's at level #3.
11828 its label is a bullet.
11829 (We got here by using
11832 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11839 arg "depth-increment"
11843 then changing the environment to
11851 \begin_layout Itemize
11856 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11863 arg "depth-increment"
11867 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
11872 \begin_layout Enumerate
11874 to get to level #5.
11877 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
11882 Notice the type of numbering,
11888 because we are in the
11896 environment (that is,
11912 \begin_layout Enumerate
11917 change the paragraph environment,
11918 but decrease the nesting depth?
11919 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
11923 \begin_layout Enumerate
11925 as if you couldn't guess by now,
11929 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11932 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
11935 \begin_layout Enumerate
11939 arg "depth-decrement"
11942 to decrease the depth after the next
11945 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11952 \begin_layout Enumerate
11954 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
11959 \begin_layout Enumerate
11961 Even though we've changed levels,
11963 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
11966 \begin_layout Enumerate
11968 even though the nesting depth has changed,
11980 that \SpecialChar LyX
11985 reset the counter for the label.
11989 \begin_layout Enumerate
11993 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11999 arg "depth-decrement"
12003 and we're back to level #2.
12005 we not only changed the nesting depth,
12006 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
12014 \begin_layout Enumerate
12015 The same thing happens if we do another
12018 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12024 arg "depth-decrement"
12027 sequence and return to level #1,
12028 the outermost level.
12031 \begin_layout Standard
12033 we reset the environment to
12039 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
12049 The number of other
12053 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
12059 The same rule applies for the
12067 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12072 \begin_layout Enumerate
12073 We're going to go totally nuts now.
12074 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
12075 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
12085 \begin_layout Standard
12094 arg "depth-increment"
12103 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
12105 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
12106 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
12107 Either before or after this,
12108 we will put in the level.
12112 \begin_layout Enumerate
12119 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
12123 \begin_layout Verse
12124 Now we will add verse.
12125 \begin_inset Newline newline
12128 It will get much worse.
12129 \begin_inset Newline newline
12140 arg "depth-increment"
12152 \begin_layout Verse
12155 \begin_inset Newline newline
12158 Bippitey boppitey boo!
12159 \begin_inset Newline newline
12165 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12173 \begin_layout Verse
12174 Here comes a table:
12178 \begin_layout Standard
12179 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
12185 \begin_layout Standard
12187 \begin_inset Tabular
12188 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
12189 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12190 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12191 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
12193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
12196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
12234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12276 \begin_layout Verse
12280 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12292 arg "depth-increment"
12299 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12306 \begin_inset Newline newline
12314 arg "depth-decrement"
12321 \begin_layout Enumerate
12328 level #1) This is another item.
12329 Note that selecting a
12333 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
12334 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
12341 \begin_layout Quotation
12342 We're now ending the
12346 list and changing to
12351 We're still at level #1.
12352 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
12353 The next set of paragraphs is a
12354 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12358 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12361 We will nest both the
12368 \begin_inset space ~
12373 environments inside of this one,
12374 then use another nested
12378 for the letter body.
12382 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
12385 to preserve the depth.
12386 Remember that you need to use
12389 arg "newline-insert newline"
12392 to create multiple lines inside the
12399 \begin_inset space ~
12409 \begin_layout Right Address
12411 \begin_inset Newline newline
12416 \begin_inset Newline newline
12422 \begin_layout Address
12424 \begin_inset space ~
12430 \begin_layout Quotation
12431 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
12432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12435 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
12437 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
12438 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
12439 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
12441 we thank you for your patience.
12444 \begin_layout Quotation
12447 now have a special on beef.
12448 If you are interested,
12449 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
12450 along with payment.
12453 \begin_layout Quotation
12454 We thank you again for your patience.
12457 \begin_layout Address
12459 \begin_inset Newline newline
12466 \begin_layout Quotation
12467 That ends that example!
12470 \begin_layout Standard
12472 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
12473 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
12474 We could have easily nested an
12496 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
12499 \begin_layout Subsection
12501 \begin_inset Index idx
12506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12508 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12523 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12525 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
12532 \begin_layout Standard
12533 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
12534 For example you need two different enumerations:
12537 \begin_layout Enumerate
12542 \begin_layout Enumerate
12547 \begin_layout Enumerate
12551 \begin_layout Standard
12552 \begin_inset Separator plain
12558 \begin_layout Itemize
12564 \begin_layout Standard
12565 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
12571 \begin_layout Enumerate
12575 \begin_layout Enumerate
12579 \begin_layout Enumerate
12583 \begin_layout Standard
12584 To split an existing list into two lists,
12585 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
12587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12588 Separated <Name> Above
12592 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12593 Separated <Name> Below
12596 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
12597 ) and before or behind it the new list.
12598 Inside nested environments,
12599 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
12602 \begin_layout Standard
12603 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
12604 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
12607 \begin_layout Standard
12609 you get an environment separator when you press
12612 arg "paragraph-break"
12619 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
12622 \begin_layout Section
12624 Pagination and Line Breaks
12625 \begin_inset Index idx
12630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12639 \begin_layout Standard
12641 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
12643 offers you more spaces:
12644 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
12645 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
12648 \begin_layout Subsection
12650 \change_deleted 177693 1654619480
12652 \change_inserted 177693 1654619480
12656 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12658 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
12663 \begin_inset Index idx
12668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12670 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12675 \change_deleted 177693 1654619483
12677 \change_inserted 177693 1654619483
12693 \begin_layout Standard
12695 \change_deleted 177693 1654619488
12697 \change_inserted 177693 1654619490
12701 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
12702 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
12704 \change_inserted 177693 1654619513
12707 break the line at that point.
12708 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
12712 \begin_layout Quote
12713 Further documentation is given in section
12714 \begin_inset Newline newline
12718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12720 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12728 \begin_layout Standard
12730 it would be a good thing to put a
12731 \change_deleted 177693 1654619535
12733 \change_inserted 177693 1654619537
12737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12751 reference "sec:Bibliography"
12757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12762 \change_deleted 177693 1654619542
12764 \change_inserted 177693 1654619544
12769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12772 \change_deleted 177693 1654619548
12774 \change_inserted 177693 1654619548
12778 \begin_inset space ~
12786 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
12792 \begin_layout Subsection
12794 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12796 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12801 \begin_inset Index idx
12806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12808 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12825 \begin_layout Standard
12826 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
12828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12829 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12833 The length units are listed in Appendix
12834 \begin_inset space ~
12838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12840 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12850 \change_deleted 177693 1654667894
12852 \change_inserted 177693 1654667898
12856 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
12858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12860 name "subsec:Normal-Space"
12865 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
12867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12869 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
12876 \begin_inset Index idx
12881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12883 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12888 \change_deleted 177693 1654667939
12890 \change_inserted 177693 1654667939
12906 \begin_layout Standard
12907 With the introduction of typewriters,
12908 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
12909 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
12910 automatically takes care about this.
12912 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
12914 \begin_inset space ~
12918 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12920 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
12926 To insert a normal space,
12929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12930 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12932 \change_deleted 177693 1654667953
12934 \change_inserted 177693 1654667953
12938 \begin_inset space ~
12946 arg "space-insert normal"
12952 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12954 \change_inserted 177693 1654668020
12958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12960 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
12965 \begin_inset Index idx
12970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12972 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
12975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12989 \begin_layout Standard
12991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12995 \change_inserted 177693 1654668039
12999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13002 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
13003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13007 \change_deleted 177693 1654619681
13009 \change_inserted 177693 1654619683
13013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13017 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
13019 inside abbreviations:
13022 \begin_layout Quote
13024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13028 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
13031 \begin_layout Standard
13032 or between values and units.
13033 Compare for example this:
13034 \begin_inset Newline newline
13038 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13042 \begin_inset Newline newline
13045 10 kg (normal space
13046 \change_inserted 177693 1654668105
13052 \begin_layout Standard
13053 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
13055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13056 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13058 \change_inserted 177693 1654668120
13060 \begin_inset space ~
13066 \begin_inset space ~
13074 arg "space-insert thin"
13080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13084 \begin_layout Standard
13085 You can also insert the following space types:
13088 \begin_layout Description
13090 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13098 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13102 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
13106 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13110 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
13112 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
13115 space between the arrows.
13116 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
13120 \begin_layout Description
13122 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
13124 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
13128 \begin_inset space ~
13131 space A line with a
13132 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13136 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
13140 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13144 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
13146 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
13149 space between the arrows.
13152 \begin_layout Description
13154 \begin_inset space ~
13158 \begin_inset space ~
13161 space A line with a
13162 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13166 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
13170 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13173 negative thin space between the arrows.
13176 \begin_layout Description
13178 \begin_inset space ~
13182 \begin_inset space ~
13185 space A line with a
13186 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13190 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
13194 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13197 negative medium space between the arrows.
13200 \begin_layout Description
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13206 \begin_inset space ~
13209 space A line with a
13210 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13214 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
13218 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13221 negative thick space between the arrows.
13224 \begin_layout Description
13226 \change_deleted 177693 1654668288
13228 \change_inserted 177693 1654668297
13230 \begin_inset space ~
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13244 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13248 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
13252 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13256 \change_deleted 177693 1654668308
13258 \change_inserted 177693 1654668324
13260 \begin_inset space ~
13266 \begin_inset space ~
13270 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13273 em) space between the arrows.
13276 \begin_layout Description
13278 \begin_inset space ~
13282 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13286 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13290 \begin_inset space \quad{}
13294 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13298 \change_deleted 177693 1654668332
13300 \change_inserted 177693 1654668332
13304 \begin_inset space ~
13308 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13311 em) space between the arrows.
13314 \begin_layout Description
13316 \change_deleted 177693 1654668340
13318 \change_inserted 177693 1654668345
13320 \begin_inset space ~
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13334 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13338 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
13342 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13346 \change_deleted 177693 1654668349
13348 \change_inserted 177693 1654668352
13350 \begin_inset space ~
13354 \change_deleted 177693 1654668352
13358 \begin_inset space ~
13362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13365 em) space between the arrows.
13368 \begin_layout Description
13370 \begin_inset space ~
13374 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13378 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
13383 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13390 cm space between the arrows.
13393 \begin_layout Standard
13395 \begin_inset space ~
13399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13401 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
13406 lists the different space sizes.
13409 \begin_layout Standard
13410 \begin_inset Float table
13417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13418 \begin_inset Caption Standard
13420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13421 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13423 name "tab:Width-of-the"
13427 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
13435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13437 \begin_inset Tabular
13438 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
13439 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
13440 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13441 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
13443 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13454 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13467 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13476 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13491 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13496 \change_deleted 177693 1654619715
13498 \change_inserted 177693 1654621248
13499 Non-breaking Normal
13506 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13521 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13530 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13535 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13539 \change_inserted 177693 1654620497
13541 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13545 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13556 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13557 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13562 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13568 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13573 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13575 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13584 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
13585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13590 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13596 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13601 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
13603 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13613 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13622 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13627 \change_deleted 177693 1654620640
13629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13633 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13639 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13649 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13658 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13663 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13673 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13682 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13697 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13702 \change_deleted 177693 1654620687
13704 \change_inserted 177693 1654620689
13708 \change_deleted 177693 1654620678
13710 \change_inserted 177693 1654620679
13714 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13727 \change_deleted 177693 1654620674
13729 \change_inserted 177693 1654620676
13733 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13737 \change_inserted 177693 1654620708
13739 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
13743 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13755 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13768 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13783 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
13786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13788 \change_deleted 177693 1654668383
13790 \change_inserted 177693 1654668384
13794 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
13805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13807 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13828 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13830 \begin_inset Index idx
13835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13837 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
13840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13854 \begin_layout Standard
13855 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
13856 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
13858 \change_inserted 177693 1654621642
13861 Fill is actually a variable length space,
13862 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
13863 If there is more than one H
13864 \change_inserted 177693 1654621633
13868 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
13871 \begin_layout Standard
13872 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
13875 \begin_layout Quote
13877 This is on the left side
13878 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13881 This is on the right
13884 \begin_layout Quote
13887 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13891 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13897 \begin_layout Quote
13900 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13904 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13908 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13914 \begin_layout Standard
13915 That was an example in the
13921 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
13925 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
13929 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
13932 is one in a standard paragraph.
13933 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
13938 sitting in-between the two arrows.
13941 \begin_layout Standard
13943 \change_deleted 177693 1654621654
13945 \change_inserted 177693 1654621654
13948 s can be made visible when you choose one of the
13951 \begin_inset space ~
13956 s in the space dialog:
13957 The following patterns are available:
13960 \begin_layout Standard
13963 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
13967 \begin_inset space ~
13973 \begin_layout Standard
13976 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
13980 \begin_inset space ~
13986 \begin_layout Standard
13989 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
13993 \begin_inset space ~
13999 \begin_layout Standard
14002 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
14006 \begin_inset space ~
14012 \begin_layout Standard
14014 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
14016 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
14020 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
14021 (= opened downwards)
14025 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
14029 \begin_inset space ~
14035 \begin_layout Standard
14037 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
14039 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
14043 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
14048 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
14052 \begin_inset space ~
14058 \begin_layout Standard
14059 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14069 \change_deleted 177693 1654621656
14071 \change_inserted 177693 1654621656
14074 is at the beginning of a line,
14079 in the first line in a paragraph,
14083 \change_deleted 177693 1654621657
14085 \change_inserted 177693 1654621657
14088 s from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
14089 If you need space in this case anyway,
14091 \change_deleted 177693 1654668432
14095 \change_inserted 177693 1654668434
14100 option in the space dialog.
14108 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14112 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14117 \begin_inset Index idx
14122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14124 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14141 \begin_layout Standard
14142 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
14144 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
14147 \begin_layout Standard
14148 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14151 What is correct English?:
14152 \begin_inset Newline newline
14156 \begin_inset Newline newline
14160 \begin_inset space ~
14163 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
14164 \begin_inset Newline newline
14168 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14179 \begin_inset Newline newline
14183 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14194 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
14200 \begin_layout Standard
14202 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
14203 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14207 \begin_inset space ~
14211 \begin_inset space ~
14215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14220 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
14222 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14223 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14227 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
14228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14232 \begin_inset space ~
14236 \begin_inset space ~
14240 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14243 into the phantom inset (note the space after
14244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14252 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
14253 That is why it is named
14254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14262 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
14263 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
14266 \begin_layout Subsection
14268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14270 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
14275 \begin_inset Index idx
14280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14282 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14299 \begin_layout Standard
14300 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
14303 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14304 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14306 \begin_inset space ~
14312 There you find the following sizes:
14315 \begin_layout Standard
14319 \change_inserted 177693 1654621302
14328 \change_inserted 177693 1654621304
14336 \change_inserted 177693 1654621306
14341 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
14342 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
14346 \change_inserted 177693 1654621298
14351 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
14353 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14354 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14356 \begin_inset space ~
14362 \begin_inset Index idx
14367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14369 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14383 for the paragraph separation.
14384 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
14387 \change_inserted 177693 1654621292
14395 \change_inserted 177693 1654621294
14401 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
14405 \begin_layout Standard
14407 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
14416 equal to the height,
14417 or half the height,
14418 of a line in the current font size including line spacing.
14423 \begin_layout Standard
14427 \change_inserted 177693 1654621333
14433 \begin_inset Index idx
14438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14440 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14454 is a variable space,
14455 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
14457 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
14462 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
14463 because the space between them is then maximal.
14467 \change_inserted 177693 1654621321
14475 \change_inserted 177693 1654621325
14481 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
14485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14489 \change_inserted 177693 1654621587
14494 s are described in section
14495 \begin_inset space ~
14499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14501 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
14511 If there are several
14514 \change_inserted 177693 1654621344
14520 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
14521 You can therefore use
14524 \change_inserted 177693 1654621329
14529 s to center text on a page,
14530 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
14533 \begin_layout Standard
14538 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
14539 \begin_inset space ~
14543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14545 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
14553 \begin_layout Standard
14554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14565 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
14566 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
14578 \begin_layout Subsection
14579 Paragraph Alignment
14580 \begin_inset Index idx
14585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14587 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14604 \begin_layout Standard
14605 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
14607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14610 dialog (toolbar button
14613 arg "layout-paragraph"
14617 There are five possibilities:
14620 \begin_layout Itemize
14628 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
14634 \begin_layout Itemize
14642 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
14648 \begin_layout Itemize
14656 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
14662 \begin_layout Itemize
14670 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
14676 \begin_layout Itemize
14684 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
14690 \begin_layout Standard
14691 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
14692 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
14693 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
14694 and look like this:
14697 \begin_layout Standard
14699 This paragraph is right aligned,
14702 \begin_layout Standard
14704 this one is centered,
14707 \begin_layout Standard
14709 this one is left aligned.
14712 \begin_layout Subsection
14714 \begin_inset Index idx
14719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14721 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14738 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
14745 \begin_layout Standard
14746 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
14747 does the page breaks in your document,
14748 you can force a page break where you want one.
14749 Normally this will not be necessary,
14750 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
14751 is good at page breaking.
14752 Only if you use a lot of
14758 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
14761 \begin_layout Standard
14762 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
14766 have to change the page breaking.
14769 \begin_layout Standard
14770 There are two types of page breaks:
14771 One that ends the page without any special action.
14772 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
14774 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14775 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14777 \begin_inset space ~
14784 that is inserted via the menu
14786 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14787 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14789 \begin_inset space ~
14795 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
14796 so that it fills out the complete page.
14797 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
14800 \begin_layout Standard
14801 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
14804 the wrong way to do it.
14806 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
14807 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
14809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14811 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
14816 to learn more about
14823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14827 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
14832 \begin_inset Index idx
14837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14839 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14856 \begin_layout Standard
14857 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
14858 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
14859 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
14860 including unprocessed floats,
14861 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
14862 if necessary by adding pages.
14865 \begin_layout Standard
14866 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
14868 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14869 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14871 \begin_inset space ~
14877 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
14878 you can use the menu
14880 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
14881 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14887 \begin_inset space ~
14892 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
14893 if necessary by adding a page.
14894 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
14898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14900 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
14901 Suppressing Page Breaks
14904 \begin_inset Index idx
14909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14911 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
14915 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
14918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14930 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
14932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14934 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
14939 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
14943 \begin_layout Standard
14945 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14946 To discourage page break at
14947 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
14949 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
14950 certain point you can use
14954 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14956 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
14959 \SpecialChar menuseparator
14961 \change_deleted 5381 1686690158
14963 \change_inserted 5381 1686690161
14965 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
14972 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
14973 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
14978 \begin_layout Subsection
14980 \begin_inset Index idx
14985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14994 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
15001 \begin_layout Standard
15002 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
15003 one simply breaks the line.
15004 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
15006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15007 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15009 \begin_inset space ~
15013 \begin_inset space ~
15021 arg "newline-insert newline"
15025 Another type that is inserted via the menu
15027 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15028 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15030 \begin_inset space ~
15034 \begin_inset space ~
15042 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
15045 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
15046 This is useful to avoid
15047 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15051 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15054 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
15057 \begin_layout Standard
15058 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
15060 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
15061 is very good at line breaking.
15064 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
15066 in a poem or for an address (see sections
15067 \begin_inset space ~
15071 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15073 reference "sec:Quote"
15080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15082 reference "sec:Verse"
15088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15090 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
15098 \begin_layout Subsection
15100 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15102 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
15107 \begin_inset Index idx
15112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15121 \begin_layout Standard
15123 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15134 \begin_layout Standard
15138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15139 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
15141 \begin_inset space ~
15146 you can insert horizontal lines.
15147 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
15148 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
15151 \begin_layout Standard
15153 \begin_inset CommandInset line
15164 \begin_layout Section
15165 Characters and Symbols
15168 \begin_layout Standard
15169 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
15170 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
15172 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
15174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15180 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
15185 for information on how this is done.
15188 \begin_layout Standard
15189 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
15194 dialog via the menu
15196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
15197 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
15203 \begin_layout Standard
15204 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15213 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
15215 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
15223 \begin_layout Section
15224 Fonts and Text Styles
15225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15227 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
15234 \begin_layout Subsection
15236 \begin_inset Index idx
15241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15243 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15260 \begin_layout Standard
15261 There are two types of fonts:
15264 \begin_layout Description
15266 \begin_inset space ~
15270 \begin_inset Index idx
15275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15277 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15291 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
15292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15296 characters) in the font.
15297 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
15298 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
15299 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
15300 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
15301 \begin_inset Newline newline
15304 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
15305 But to achieve a better quality,
15306 many fonts define several font sizes.
15307 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
15308 \begin_inset Newline newline
15324 \begin_inset space ~
15332 \begin_layout Description
15334 \begin_inset space ~
15338 \begin_inset Index idx
15343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15345 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15360 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
15361 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
15363 they don't scale well,
15364 because in order to scale a glyph,
15365 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
15366 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
15367 In order to mitigate this effect,
15368 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
15369 \begin_inset space ~
15372 pixels high up to 34
15373 \begin_inset space ~
15376 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
15377 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
15378 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
15379 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
15381 \begin_inset Newline newline
15384 Bitmap fonts are named
15387 \begin_inset space ~
15392 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
15395 \begin_layout Standard
15396 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
15397 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
15398 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
15399 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
15402 \begin_layout Standard
15403 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
15404 look at its document properties.
15407 \begin_layout Standard
15408 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying
15409 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
15411 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
15414 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
15416 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font,
15417 to emphasize text you use an
15418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15426 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
15428 In \SpecialChar LyX
15430 you do things based on contexts,
15431 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
15434 \begin_layout Subsection
15437 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15439 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15446 \begin_layout Standard
15449 used its own fonts.
15451 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
15452 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15454 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15455 needs some extra information about the fonts,
15456 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
15457 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
15458 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
15459 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
15460 files are very portable across different machines.
15462 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
15463 has increased a lot in the meantime;
15464 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
15466 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
15467 \begin_inset space ~
15471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15473 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
15479 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
15480 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
15483 \begin_layout Standard
15484 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
15485 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
15486 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15487 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15489 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
15492 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
15493 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
15496 \begin_layout Standard
15497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
15500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15507 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
15509 or other font deficiencies;
15510 so you might have to experiment.
15518 \begin_layout Subsection
15519 Document Font and Font size
15520 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15522 name "subsec:Document-Font"
15527 \begin_inset Index idx
15532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15534 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15549 \begin_inset Index idx
15554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15556 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15573 \begin_layout Standard
15574 You can set the document fonts in the
15576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15580 \begin_inset Index idx
15585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15587 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
15590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15606 section of the dialog,
15607 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
15612 \begin_inset space ~
15622 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
15623 \begin_inset space ~
15626 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
15629 \begin_layout Standard
15635 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
15636 This requires that you use
15649 as the output format,
15651 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15655 \begin_inset space \space{}
15658 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
15659 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15660 installed (see section
15661 \begin_inset space ~
15665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15667 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15673 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
15675 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
15676 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
15678 \begin_inset space ~
15683 since \SpecialChar LyX
15684 cannot determine the family.
15685 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
15686 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15689 cannot determine this in advance,
15690 so you might need to experiment.
15693 \begin_layout Standard
15694 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
15695 fonts (which is the default),
15696 the possible options for the font include
15700 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
15707 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
15709 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
15711 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
15716 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
15718 depending on the document language,
15722 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
15723 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15731 \begin_inset space ~
15737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15747 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
15748 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15756 \begin_inset space ~
15762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15770 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
15775 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15792 European Computer Modern
15795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15804 some classes set different default fonts.
15807 \begin_layout Standard
15813 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
15814 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
15818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15819 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
15822 \begin_inset space ~
15827 version 6 or later,
15828 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
15833 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
15834 you have to use a vector font.
15835 Depending on how your document should look,
15839 \begin_layout Itemize
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15849 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
15861 \begin_inset space ~
15866 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15867 community in order to replace
15871 as the default font.
15872 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
15873 Except for some details,
15874 where the appearance was improved,
15878 \begin_inset space ~
15891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15892 One difference is improved kerning.
15900 \begin_layout Itemize
15901 If you do not like the look of
15910 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
15912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15916 \begin_inset space ~
15922 \begin_inset space ~
15932 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
15933 \begin_inset space ~
15936 serif and typewriter fonts,
15940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15941 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
15942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15949 \begin_inset space ~
15958 for sans serif text),
15959 or different shapes of the same font,
15961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15965 \begin_inset space \space{}
15973 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
15977 \begin_inset space \space{}
15983 \begin_inset space ~
15991 \begin_inset space ~
16001 but you can also select your own.
16002 \begin_inset Newline newline
16005 The differences between roman,
16009 \begin_inset space ~
16018 fonts are explained in section
16019 \begin_inset space ~
16023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16025 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16031 \begin_inset Newline newline
16037 \begin_inset space ~
16042 was originally designed for newspapers.
16043 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
16047 \begin_inset space ~
16052 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
16055 \begin_layout Standard
16056 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
16072 Some classes provide additional sizes.
16077 depends on the class you are using.
16078 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
16081 \begin_layout Standard
16082 Note that the font size is the
16087 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
16088 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
16090 and subscripts) by this value.
16091 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
16094 \begin_inset space ~
16100 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
16101 \begin_inset space ~
16105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16107 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16115 \begin_layout Standard
16119 \begin_inset space ~
16124 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
16126 \begin_inset space ~
16129 serif or typewriter.
16134 selection uses what is preset by the class,
16135 the other selections override this.
16146 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
16149 \begin_layout Standard
16154 LaTeX font encoding
16156 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16162 \begin_inset Index idx
16167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16170 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16185 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
16187 \begin_inset space ~
16191 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16193 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
16202 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
16203 Unless you have specific reasons,
16205 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
16209 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
16217 \begin_layout Standard
16221 Use Old Style Figures
16225 Use True Small Caps
16228 These are extra features some fonts provide.
16231 Use Old Style Figures
16234 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
16235 Old style figures are the numerals (0
16236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16240 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16243 9) with ascenders and descenders,
16244 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
16247 Use True Small Caps
16249 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
16250 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
16251 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
16252 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
16256 \begin_layout Standard
16258 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
16261 you can add additional (comma-separated) options provided by the font package (or the
16266 if you use non-TeX fonts),
16272 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
16278 \begin_layout Standard
16283 allows users of the languages Chinese,
16285 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
16289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16290 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16296 \begin_inset Index idx
16301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16304 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16318 So this has no effect for the document language
16334 \begin_layout Standard
16337 Enable micro-typographic extensions
16339 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16345 \begin_inset Index idx
16350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16353 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 \begin_layout Standard
16374 Disallow line breaks after dashes
16376 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
16380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
16383 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16389 instead of ligatures (--,
16391 \begin_inset space ~
16395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16397 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16408 \begin_layout Standard
16409 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
16413 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
16416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16422 When you choose a new font or font size,
16428 change the screen font!
16429 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
16430 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
16432 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
16434 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
16439 \begin_inset space ~
16443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16445 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
16458 \begin_layout Subsection
16462 \begin_layout Standard
16463 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
16464 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
16465 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
16466 fonts for your document,
16467 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
16469 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16473 \begin_inset Index idx
16478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16480 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
16483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16495 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
16496 automatically selects a math font.
16497 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
16498 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
16499 's default font family
16500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16506 \begin_inset space ~
16512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16517 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
16520 \begin_layout Standard
16521 Note that the math font will not be used for
16525 (which is inserted with the shortcut
16531 or by the insertion of the command
16538 Also note that some math fonts are sans
16539 \begin_inset space ~
16543 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
16545 \begin_inset space ~
16548 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
16551 \begin_inset space ~
16559 \begin_inset space ~
16564 in the document font settings.
16567 \begin_layout Standard
16568 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
16569 fonts for the document,
16570 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
16571 font (in most cases
16572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 \begin_inset space ~
16584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16587 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
16588 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
16589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16595 \begin_inset space ~
16601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16607 \begin_layout Subsection
16609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
16611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
16615 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
16617 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16619 name "subsec:charstyles"
16626 \begin_inset Index idx
16631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16638 \begin_inset Index idx
16643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16652 \begin_layout Standard
16653 As we've already seen,
16655 automatically changes the
16656 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
16659 style for certain paragraph environments.
16661 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
16663 we will explain how the style of selected text passages can by changed.
16664 This is where we meet the concept of
16670 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
16672 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
16676 \begin_layout Standard
16678 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
16684 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
16686 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
16700 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
16707 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16711 available with all document classes.
16713 some document classes and modules provide
16717 for specific purposes.
16718 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
16721 \begin_layout Standard
16723 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
16726 allow us just a few words of what we mean by
16735 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
16740 if you wanted to emphasize a word,
16741 you selected it and chose e.
16742 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16763 encourage the use of
16775 instead (although formal markup is still possible;
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16783 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16789 Rather than fiddling with
16794 they encourage the use of
16799 who are defined with regard to their function (e.
16800 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16805 \begin_inset Quotes els
16809 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16814 \begin_inset Quotes els
16818 \begin_inset Quotes ers
16822 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
16824 using functional categories keeps you thinking about why you are actually marking up,
16825 if your markup is consistent and systematic,
16826 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
16827 On a more practical level,
16828 it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
16829 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names in
16834 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
16835 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16841 you would have to change any single occurrence.
16842 With a semantic markup (such as
16848 you'd just need to change the definition of
16853 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16856 semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions of a document,
16857 using different markup semantics.
16860 \begin_layout Standard
16862 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
16864 we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided by \SpecialChar LyX
16870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16872 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
16873 Builtin Text Styles
16874 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16876 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
16883 \begin_layout Standard
16885 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
16886 The two builtin text styles can be
16887 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
16891 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
16895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
16896 both of these styles
16899 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16903 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
16905 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
16907 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
16914 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
16922 \begin_layout Standard
16928 do one of the following:
16931 \begin_layout Itemize
16932 click on the toolbar button
16941 \begin_layout Itemize
16942 use the key binding
16949 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
16953 \begin_layout Itemize
16955 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16959 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
16961 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
16963 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16971 arg "dialog-show character"
16975 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
16979 arg "dialog-show character"
16983 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
16984 as described in section
16985 \begin_inset space ~
16989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16991 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
16997 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
17007 \begin_layout Standard
17009 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
17011 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
17015 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
17019 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
17021 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
17025 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
17034 style is already active,
17035 they deactivate it.
17038 \begin_layout Standard
17039 One typically uses the
17043 style for proper names.
17046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17053 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
17055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
17063 \begin_layout Standard
17065 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
17071 is producing text in
17076 but the definition can be changed.
17081 \begin_layout Standard
17083 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
17085 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
17093 You can activate (or deactivate —
17094 it's also a toggle) the
17101 \begin_layout Itemize
17102 clicking on the toolbar button
17111 \begin_layout Itemize
17112 using the keybindings
17119 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
17123 \begin_layout Itemize
17125 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17129 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
17131 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
17133 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17141 arg "dialog-show character"
17145 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
17149 arg "dialog-show character"
17153 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
17154 as described in section
17155 \begin_inset space ~
17159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17161 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17167 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
17177 \begin_layout Standard
17182 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
17184 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
17186 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
17189 packages use a different font
17190 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
17192 and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17198 \begin_layout Standard
17199 We've been using the
17203 style all over the place in this document.
17204 Here's one more example:
17207 \begin_layout Quotation
17211 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
17213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
17219 \begin_layout Standard
17220 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
17221 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
17222 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
17223 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse
17224 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
17226 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
17231 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
17233 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
17237 \begin_layout Standard
17239 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
17240 In contrast to the custom text styles,
17241 the builtin styles are represented only as font changes and integrated in the
17249 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
17252 always reset to the default font using the key binding
17259 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
17261 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
17265 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
17268 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17270 \begin_inset space ~
17273 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17275 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17285 arg "dialog-show character"
17291 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17293 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
17299 arg "dialog-show character"
17303 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
17307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17309 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
17311 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17313 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
17320 \begin_layout Standard
17322 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
17323 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class,
17324 a module (see section
17325 \begin_inset space ~
17329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17331 reference "subsec:Modules"
17340 or local layout settings (see section
17341 \begin_inset space ~
17345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17347 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
17353 As the two builtin styles,
17358 markup for specific functions.
17365 module that provides,
17366 among other things,
17367 some custom text styles to markup linguistic levels:
17379 \begin_inset Quotes els
17383 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17389 \begin_layout Standard
17391 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17392 These styles can be found,
17396 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17398 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
17400 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
17406 \begin_layout Standard
17408 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
17409 For the purpose of demonstration,
17410 we have loaded in this document the optional module
17414 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
17415 By example of the emphasized style,
17416 we can see the differences in look and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same):
17421 appears as normal font change,
17422 the custom text style
17423 \begin_inset Flex Emph
17426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17428 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
17436 appears as an inset,
17437 with a label below that identifies its semantics.
17438 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
17440 the three others from the module we have loaded are:
17442 \begin_inset Flex Code
17445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17447 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
17457 \begin_inset Flex Strong
17460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17462 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
17472 \begin_inset Flex Noun
17475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17477 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
17486 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate on screen their formal appearance.
17491 \begin_layout Subsection
17493 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
17495 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
17499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
17505 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
17507 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
17513 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
17515 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
17519 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17521 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
17526 \begin_inset Index idx
17531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17540 \begin_layout Standard
17541 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
17542 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
17546 so \SpecialChar LyX
17548 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
17550 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
17554 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
17555 the properties of text passages
17556 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
17561 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
17563 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
17564 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
17568 \begin_layout Standard
17570 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
17571 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module for this purpose (which is,
17573 generally the better way of handling such issues),
17574 you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak the properties of the respective text passages.
17579 comes in as a last resort.
17584 \begin_layout Standard
17585 Before we document how to
17586 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
17587 use custom character style
17588 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
17589 tweak the text properties
17592 we want to issue a warning yet again:
17594 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
17596 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
17601 \begin_inset Newline newline
17604 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
17607 \begin_layout Standard
17609 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
17610 use custom character styles
17611 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
17612 tweak text properties
17616 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
17619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17621 \begin_inset space ~
17624 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17632 arg "dialog-show character"
17635 dialog or press the toolbar button
17638 arg "dialog-show character"
17643 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
17646 boxes in this dialog,
17647 each corresponding to a different
17648 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
17650 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
17653 property that you can choose.
17654 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
17658 \begin_inset space ~
17664 which keeps the current state of that property.
17666 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
17670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
17672 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
17677 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
17678 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
17681 \begin_layout Standard
17683 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
17685 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
17689 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
17691 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
17695 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
17697 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
17703 and their options (in addition to
17706 \begin_inset space ~
17712 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
17716 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
17724 \begin_layout Labeling
17725 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17739 The possible options are:
17743 \begin_layout Labeling
17744 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17749 This is the Roman font family.
17750 Normally a serif font.
17751 It's also the default family.
17761 \begin_layout Labeling
17762 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17766 \begin_inset space ~
17773 This is the Sans Serif font family.
17785 \begin_layout Labeling
17786 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17793 This is the Typewriter font family.
17799 arg "font-typewriter"
17805 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
17809 \begin_layout Standard
17811 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
17812 The general differences of these families are:
17815 \begin_layout Itemize
17817 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
17822 fonts use characters with serifs.
17823 These are the small
17824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17831 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17832 The following example shows the difference:
17833 \begin_inset Newline newline
17837 \begin_inset Newline newline
17842 text without serifs
17845 \begin_inset Newline newline
17848 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17849 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17856 \begin_layout Itemize
17858 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17863 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17864 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17865 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17868 \begin_layout Itemize
17870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17884 which means every character has the same width;
17886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17894 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17898 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17903 \begin_inset Newline newline
17907 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17925 \begin_inset Note Note
17928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17930 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
17931 For more on phantoms see section
17932 \begin_inset space ~
17936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17938 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17949 \begin_inset Newline newline
17958 \begin_layout Labeling
17959 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17964 This corresponds to the print weight.
17969 \begin_layout Labeling
17970 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17975 This is the Medium font series.
17976 It's also the default series.
17979 \begin_layout Labeling
17980 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17987 This is the Bold font series.
18000 \begin_layout Labeling
18001 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18006 As the name implies.
18011 \begin_layout Labeling
18012 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18017 This is the Upright font shape.
18018 It's also the default shape.
18021 \begin_layout Labeling
18022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18032 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
18037 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
18042 s the Italic font shape
18048 \begin_layout Labeling
18049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18056 This is the Slanted font shape
18058 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
18060 this is different from italic).
18063 \begin_layout Labeling
18064 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18068 \begin_inset space ~
18075 This is the Small caps font shape
18082 \begin_layout Labeling
18083 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18085 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18090 Alters the text color.
18091 Note that not all DVI
18092 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
18094 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18095 viewers are able to display colors.
18099 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
18101 \begin_inset space ~
18105 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18109 which means that the document default color set in
18111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18118 \begin_inset space ~
18125 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
18127 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18129 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
18131 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
18226 \begin_inset Index idx
18231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18233 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18248 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
18254 \begin_layout Labeling
18255 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18257 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18262 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
18263 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
18264 workarea in blue to indicate the change
18265 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
18266 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
18268 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
18270 \begin_inset Newline newline
18273 If you have for example,
18274 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
18276 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
18277 When using the spell checking (see section
18278 \begin_inset space ~
18282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18284 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
18289 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
18290 \begin_inset Newline newline
18293 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
18296 Exclude from Spellchecking
18299 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
18300 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
18304 \begin_layout Labeling
18305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18310 Alters the size of the font.
18312 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
18314 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
18318 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
18321 numerical values here;
18322 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
18324 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
18326 but a general description of what you want to do.
18331 \begin_layout Labeling
18332 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18353 arg "font-size tiny"
18359 \begin_layout Labeling
18360 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18381 arg "font-size scriptsize"
18387 \begin_layout Labeling
18388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18409 arg "font-size footnotesize"
18415 \begin_layout Labeling
18416 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18424 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18437 arg "font-size small"
18443 \begin_layout Labeling
18444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18458 It's also the default size.
18462 arg "font-size normal"
18468 \begin_layout Labeling
18469 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18490 arg "font-size large"
18496 \begin_layout Labeling
18497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18518 arg "font-size larger"
18524 \begin_layout Labeling
18525 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18546 arg "font-size largest"
18552 \begin_layout Labeling
18553 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18574 arg "font-size huge"
18580 \begin_layout Labeling
18581 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18602 arg "font-size giant"
18608 \begin_layout Labeling
18609 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18614 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
18616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18635 arg "font-size increase"
18641 \begin_layout Labeling
18642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18647 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
18649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18668 arg "font-size decrease"
18674 \begin_layout Standard
18680 don't go crazy with this feature.
18681 You should almost never need to change the font size.
18683 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
18685 This is here for fine-tuning only!
18686 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
18691 \begin_layout Standard
18693 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
18694 Another combo box allows to tweak
18701 \begin_layout Labeling
18702 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18704 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18709 Alters the text color.
18710 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
18716 which means that the document default color set in
18718 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18719 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18725 \begin_inset space ~
18825 \begin_inset Index idx
18830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18836 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
18839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18841 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
18859 \begin_layout Labeling
18860 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18862 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
18866 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
18872 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
18873 change a few other things at the character level
18874 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
18875 have text passages being underlined
18879 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
18880 Avoid using underlining if you can!
18881 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18882 when you could not change fonts.
18883 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18884 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18885 because some people
18889 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18896 \begin_layout Labeling
18897 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18899 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
18906 This is text with emphasize on
18909 This might seem like the same as
18914 but it is actually a bit different.
18920 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
18921 Normally this font is equal to italic.
18922 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
18926 \begin_layout Labeling
18927 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18929 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
18934 Don't use underlining.
18939 \begin_layout Labeling
18940 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18942 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
18946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
18954 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
18956 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
18965 arg "font-underline"
18971 \begin_inset Newline newline
18975 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
18978 Avoid using underbar if you can!
18979 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
18980 when you could not change fonts.
18981 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
18982 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
18983 because some people
18987 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
18992 \begin_layout Labeling
18993 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
18997 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
18999 \begin_inset space ~
19008 This is text with Double under
19009 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
19011 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
19020 arg "font-underunderline"
19024 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
19026 \begin_inset Newline newline
19029 As we just warned you against using underbar,
19030 you can imagine what we think about double underbar
19035 \begin_layout Labeling
19036 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19040 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
19042 \begin_inset space ~
19051 This is text with Wavy under
19052 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
19054 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
19063 arg "font-underwave"
19067 \begin_inset Newline newline
19070 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
19071 Keep antinausea pills handy.
19072 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
19077 \begin_layout Labeling
19078 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19080 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
19085 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
19091 \begin_layout Labeling
19092 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19094 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
19099 Don't use strikethrough.
19102 \begin_layout Labeling
19103 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19107 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
19109 \begin_inset space ~
19113 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
19121 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
19123 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
19124 Single strikethrough
19132 arg "font-strikeout"
19136 \begin_inset Newline newline
19139 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
19142 \begin_layout Labeling
19143 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19145 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
19149 \begin_inset space ~
19153 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
19155 \begin_inset space ~
19159 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
19167 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
19169 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
19175 \begin_inset Newline newline
19178 This is used to make text hardly readable.
19182 \begin_layout Standard
19184 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
19185 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
19188 \begin_layout Labeling
19189 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
19191 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
19196 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
19197 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
19198 workarea in blue to indicate the change.
19199 \begin_inset Newline newline
19202 If you have for example,
19203 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
19205 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
19206 When using the spell checking (see section
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19213 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
19218 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
19219 \begin_inset Newline newline
19222 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked,
19225 Exclude from Spellchecking
19228 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
19231 \begin_layout Standard
19233 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19234 In addition to all the formal markup described above,
19235 the dialog also provides you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
19236 \begin_inset space ~
19240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19242 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
19248 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
19252 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
19258 \begin_layout Itemize
19260 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
19268 This is text with emphasize on
19273 \begin_layout Itemize
19277 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
19285 This is text with Noun on.
19287 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
19295 this is a logical attribute.
19296 Normally it's equivalent to
19299 \begin_inset space ~
19309 \begin_layout Standard
19310 So you have a huge number of combinations to
19311 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
19313 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
19318 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
19319 chosen a new character style
19320 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
19321 applied a text property
19324 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
19327 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
19329 \begin_inset space ~
19332 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
19340 arg "dialog-show character"
19346 arg "dialog-show character"
19351 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
19355 You can activate the
19356 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
19358 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
19359 last applied properties
19361 by using the toolbar button
19364 arg "textstyle-apply"
19368 The button lets you apply
19369 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
19370 your custom character style
19371 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
19374 even when the dialog isn't visible.
19376 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
19377 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again,
19378 a press on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
19379 20) most recently applied settings,
19380 from which you can select one.
19385 \begin_layout Standard
19386 To completely reset the
19387 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
19389 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
19390 text properties of a selection
19394 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
19396 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
19406 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
19411 from the menu of the toolbar button
19414 arg "textstyle-apply"
19421 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
19422 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
19423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19442 \begin_inset space ~
19456 \begin_layout Standard
19458 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19459 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
19467 \begin_inset space ~
19480 \begin_layout Itemize
19482 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19488 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19496 which means every character has the same width;
19498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19515 \begin_inset Newline newline
19519 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
19522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 \begin_inset Note Note
19536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19537 For more on phantoms see section
19538 \begin_inset space ~
19542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19544 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
19555 \begin_inset Newline newline
19561 \begin_layout Itemize
19563 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19568 fonts use characters with serifs.
19569 These are the small
19570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19577 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
19578 The following example shows the difference:
19579 \begin_inset Newline newline
19583 \begin_inset Newline newline
19588 text without serifs
19591 \begin_inset Newline newline
19594 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
19595 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
19602 \begin_layout Itemize
19604 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
19609 is not recommended for use as a base type.
19610 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
19611 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
19616 \begin_layout Standard
19618 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
19619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19626 refers to applying or removing font properties.
19627 When a property is marked for toggling in the
19630 \begin_inset space ~
19636 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
19639 apply a style with properties A,
19640 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
19643 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
19644 the text ends up with properties A,
19648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19663 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
19664 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
19665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19673 toggling behavior is up to you.
19677 \begin_inset space ~
19683 all of the left side properties are toggled;
19688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19717 \begin_inset space ~
19723 then apply the style to bold face text,
19724 the text will revert to the default series (
19725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19733 no matter how many times you apply the style.
19738 \begin_layout Standard
19740 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
19743 with the same warning once again:
19744 Do not overuse the fonts!
19746 more often than not,
19747 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
19750 \begin_layout Section
19751 Printing and Previewing
19754 \begin_layout Subsection
19758 \begin_layout Standard
19759 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
19761 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
19762 Before we tell you that,
19763 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
19764 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
19766 Additional Features
19771 \begin_layout Standard
19773 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
19776 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
19777 typesetting system,
19778 but to prevent confusion,
19779 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19782 is what you use to do your actual writing.
19785 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19786 to turn your writing into printable output.
19787 This happens in two stages:
19790 \begin_layout Enumerate
19793 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
19795 generating a file with the extension,
19797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19811 \begin_layout Enumerate
19814 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19815 to use the commands in the
19819 file to produce printable output.
19822 \begin_layout Subsection
19823 Output file formats
19824 \begin_inset Index idx
19829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19836 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19838 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19845 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19847 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
19849 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
19853 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
19857 \begin_inset Index idx
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19864 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
19867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
19871 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
19887 \begin_layout Standard
19888 This file type has the extension
19889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19901 It contains your document as plain text
19902 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
19904 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
19905 following the rules of the
19906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19909 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
19910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19918 \begin_layout Standard
19919 You can export your document to
19920 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
19922 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
19927 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19928 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19930 \begin_inset space ~
19937 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
19938 bibliography (section
19939 \begin_inset space ~
19943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19945 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
19951 If your document includes such material,
19954 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
19955 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
19957 \begin_inset space ~
19961 \begin_inset space ~
19965 \begin_inset space ~
19973 \begin_inset space ~
19977 \begin_inset space ~
19983 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
19984 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
19986 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
19992 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19995 \begin_inset Index idx
20000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20020 \begin_layout Standard
20021 This file type has the extension
20022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20033 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20034 program to process your document.
20035 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
20037 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
20038 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
20039 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
20040 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
20041 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
20044 \begin_layout Standard
20045 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20046 -file using the menu
20048 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20049 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20053 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
20054 export variants are explained in section
20055 \begin_inset space ~
20059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20061 reference "subsec:Export"
20069 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20071 \begin_inset Index idx
20076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20078 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20095 \begin_layout Standard
20096 This file type has the extension
20097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20118 because it is completely portable;
20119 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
20120 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
20124 \begin_layout Standard
20125 DVI files do not contain images,
20126 they only link to them.
20127 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
20128 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
20129 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
20130 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
20133 \begin_layout Standard
20134 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
20136 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20137 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20142 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20143 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20145 \begin_inset space ~
20151 The latter option uses the program
20153 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20159 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20162 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20163 \begin_inset space ~
20167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20169 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20175 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20176 is still a work in progress,
20177 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20181 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20183 \begin_inset Index idx
20188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20207 \begin_layout Standard
20208 This file type has the extension
20209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20221 PostScript was developed by the company
20225 as a printer language.
20226 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
20227 PostScript can be seen as a
20228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20231 programming language
20232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20236 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20241 If you are interested in learning more about this,
20242 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20248 \begin_inset Index idx
20253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20256 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20275 As a result of this,
20276 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
20279 \begin_layout Standard
20280 PostScript can only contain images in the format
20281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20284 Encapsulated PostScript
20285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20302 As \SpecialChar LyX
20303 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
20304 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
20308 \begin_inset space ~
20311 images in your document,
20314 \begin_inset space ~
20317 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
20318 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
20320 So if you plan to use PostScript,
20321 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
20324 \begin_layout Standard
20325 You can export to PostScript using the menu
20327 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20328 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20334 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20336 \begin_inset Index idx
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20358 \begin_inset Index idx
20363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20372 \begin_layout Standard
20373 This file type has the extension
20374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20390 Portable Document Format
20391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20398 was derived from PostScript.
20399 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
20401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20409 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
20412 \begin_layout Standard
20413 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
20414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20417 Joint Photographic Experts Group
20418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20450 Portable Network Graphics
20451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20468 You can also use any other image format,
20469 because \SpecialChar LyX
20470 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
20471 But as described in the section about PostScript,
20472 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
20473 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
20476 \begin_layout Standard
20477 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
20479 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20485 \begin_layout Description
20487 \begin_inset space ~
20490 (pdflatex) This uses the program
20494 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20497 \begin_layout Description
20499 \begin_inset space ~
20506 ) This uses the program
20508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20511 which converts your file directly to PDF.
20514 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20523 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20524 \begin_inset space ~
20528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20530 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20536 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
20537 is still a work in progress,
20538 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
20542 \begin_layout Description
20544 \begin_inset space ~
20551 ) This uses the program
20556 that converts your file directly to PDF.
20562 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
20563 \begin_inset space ~
20567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20569 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
20575 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
20577 vertically written Japanese.
20580 \begin_layout Description
20582 \begin_inset space ~
20585 (cropped) This is the same as
20588 \begin_inset space ~
20593 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
20594 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
20595 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
20598 \begin_layout Description
20600 \begin_inset space ~
20603 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
20607 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
20610 \begin_layout Description
20612 \begin_inset space ~
20615 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
20619 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
20620 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
20624 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
20625 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
20628 \begin_layout Standard
20632 \begin_inset space ~
20641 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
20644 and works without problems.
20645 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
20646 or specific OpenType fonts,
20647 you might want to try out
20650 \begin_inset space ~
20658 \begin_inset space ~
20664 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
20671 \begin_layout Subsubsection
20673 \begin_inset Index idx
20678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20680 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 \begin_inset Index idx
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 \begin_layout Standard
20710 This file type has the extension
20711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20723 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
20724 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
20725 When \SpecialChar LyX
20727 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
20728 For the math output you can choose in the menu
20730 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20731 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20734 between different formats,
20735 which are described in section
20737 Math Output in XHTML
20742 \begin_inset space ~
20750 \begin_layout Standard
20751 XHTML output remains
20752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20760 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
20761 features are supported yet.
20765 and the World Wide Web
20770 Additional Features
20773 for more information.
20776 \begin_layout Standard
20777 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
20779 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20780 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20786 \begin_layout Subsection
20788 \begin_inset Index idx
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20795 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
20798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 \begin_layout Standard
20813 To get a look at the final version of your document,
20814 with all of the page breaks in place,
20815 the footnotes correctly numbered,
20825 or use the toolbar button
20832 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
20833 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
20834 \begin_inset space ~
20838 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20840 reference "sec:File-Formats"
20845 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
20846 \begin_inset space ~
20850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20852 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
20858 Further output formats can be selected via
20860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20861 View (Other Formats)
20863 or the toolbar button
20872 \begin_layout Standard
20873 If you have changed your document,
20874 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
20876 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20882 Update (Other Formats)
20888 \begin_layout Standard
20889 When you preview a file,
20890 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
20891 's temporary directory.
20892 To have a real output,
20893 export your document.
20896 \begin_layout Section
20897 A few Words about Typography
20898 \begin_inset Index idx
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20912 \begin_layout Subsection
20914 Dashes and Minus Signs
20915 \begin_inset Index idx
20920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20927 \begin_inset Index idx
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20941 \begin_layout Standard
20942 In \SpecialChar LyX
20945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20956 symbol comes in four variants:
20977 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
20983 \begin_layout Standard
20984 \begin_inset Box Frameless
20994 height_special "totalheight"
20999 backgroundcolor "none"
21002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21003 \begin_inset Tabular
21004 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
21005 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21006 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21007 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21008 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21009 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21010 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21078 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21079 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 system key combination
21105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21107 the en dash is entered with
21110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21119 and the em dash with
21122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21135 is the Mac label for the right
21145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21149 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21158 <row interlinespace="3mm">
21159 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21182 system key combination or
21183 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21197 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 \begin_inset Formula $-$
21218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21249 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
21255 \begin_layout Standard
21256 Dashes can also be inserted with
21258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21260 \begin_inset space ~
21263 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
21271 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
21274 \begin_layout Standard
21275 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
21276 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
21277 Here are some examples:
21280 \begin_layout Enumerate
21281 line- and page-breaks
21282 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21292 \begin_layout Enumerate
21295 \begin_inset space ~
21299 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21309 \begin_layout Enumerate
21310 The em dash is used without spaces:
21313 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21323 \begin_layout Enumerate
21324 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
21328 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
21338 \begin_layout Standard
21340 \begin_inset CommandInset href
21342 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
21343 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
21351 \begin_layout Subsection
21352 Dashes and Line Breaks
21353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21355 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
21362 \begin_layout Standard
21363 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
21365 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21371 \begin_layout Itemize
21373 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
21374 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
21377 \begin_layout Itemize
21379 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
21382 \begin_layout Itemize
21383 In French and Spanish,
21384 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
21385 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
21388 \begin_layout Standard
21390 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
21391 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21402 allows line breaks after hyphens
21403 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
21406 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
21409 en-dashes and em-dashes.
21412 \begin_layout Enumerate
21413 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
21414 \begin_inset space ~
21417 – common in British English and generally recommended by
21419 The Elements of Typographic Style
21422 \begin_inset space ~
21425 – can be prevented using
21426 \change_deleted 177693 1654619779
21428 \change_inserted 177693 1654619781
21434 \begin_layout Enumerate
21435 Unwanted line breaks
21440 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
21442 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
21445 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
21449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 Prevent Hyphenation
21457 \begin_inset space ~
21473 in \SpecialChar TeX
21475 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21478 \change_deleted 177693 1654619787
21480 \change_inserted 177693 1654619789
21482 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
21483 space does not suffice
21487 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
21492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
21495 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not in the document language.
21496 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French and Spanish.
21509 \begin_layout Itemize
21511 \begin_inset space ~
21515 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21525 height_special "totalheight"
21530 backgroundcolor "none"
21533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21542 \begin_layout Itemize
21544 \begin_inset Box Frameless
21554 height_special "totalheight"
21559 backgroundcolor "none"
21562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21564 \begin_inset space ~
21572 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21573 \begin_inset space ~
21576 – sont très utiles.
21579 \begin_layout Itemize
21584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21594 un inciso con rayas—
21599 \begin_layout Standard
21600 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
21601 \begin_inset space ~
21604 – in contrast to an overfull line
21605 \begin_inset space ~
21608 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21612 \begin_layout Standard
21613 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
21614 you can select the option
21616 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21617 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21618 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21619 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21624 \begin_layout Enumerate
21625 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
21626 They can be prevented using
21627 \change_deleted 177693 1654619794
21629 \change_inserted 177693 1654619796
21632 spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
21638 \begin_layout Itemize
21640 \begin_inset space ~
21643 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
21644 \begin_inset space ~
21647 – sont très utiles.
21651 \begin_layout Enumerate
21652 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
21653 \begin_inset Newline newline
21658 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21659 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21661 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
21663 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
21665 \begin_inset space ~
21671 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
21673 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
21675 \begin_inset space ~
21686 \begin_layout Itemize
21687 Em-dashes without spaces—
21688 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21689 common in American English—
21690 \SpecialChar allowbreak
21691 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
21694 \begin_layout Standard
21695 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
21696 \begin_inset space ~
21700 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21702 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21714 \begin_layout Enumerate
21717 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
21718 \begin_inset space ~
21722 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21724 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
21735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
21736 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
21739 \begin_layout Standard
21740 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
21742 \begin_inset space ~
21746 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
21748 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21752 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21755 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
21763 \begin_layout Standard
21764 Since \SpecialChar LyX
21766 \begin_inset space ~
21770 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21771 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
21773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21777 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21780 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
21785 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
21793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21794 The behavior was changed since
21795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21799 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21813 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
21814 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
21822 \begin_layout Standard
21825 \begin_inset space ~
21833 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
21835 \begin_inset space ~
21838 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
21841 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
21842 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
21843 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
21844 Disallow line breaks after dashes
21846 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
21851 If you used both literal and
21852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21859 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
21861 \begin_inset space ~
21865 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
21868 \begin_layout Subsection
21870 \begin_inset Index idx
21875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21884 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
21891 \begin_layout Standard
21892 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
21893 but automatically in the output.
21894 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21900 \begin_inset Index idx
21905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21922 following the rules of the document language.
21924 does not hyphenate text in the
21928 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
21931 \begin_layout Standard
21933 hyphenates almost perfectly;
21934 it only has problems with text in the
21938 font and with unusual constructs,
21940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21948 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
21949 cannot break a word correctly,
21950 you can set hyphenation points manually.
21951 This is done with the menu
21953 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21954 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21956 \begin_inset space ~
21963 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420767
21964 Note that adding hyphenation points disables the default ones:
21965 The word will no longer break at the places it previously would have.
21967 \change_deleted -584632292 1697420769
21969 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420770
21973 \change_deleted -584632292 1697420699
21975 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420772
21978 hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21980 If no hyphenation is necessary,
21983 \change_inserted -584632292 1697420971
21987 \begin_layout Standard
21989 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421156
21990 If there is a word you use often that \SpecialChar LaTeX
21991 does not hyphenate correctly,
21992 you can tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
21993 how to hyphenate it by adding a command to the preamble,
21996 \begin_inset Flex Code
21999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421061
22004 hyphenation{dis-quo-ta-tion}
22012 If there are a lot of these,
22013 you can collect them in a single file (say,
22015 \begin_inset Flex Code
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22020 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421096
22028 ) and then import the file via:
22030 \begin_inset Flex Code
22033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421113
22038 usepackage{myhyphens}
22046 Make sure to put the file somewhere \SpecialChar LaTeX
22052 \begin_layout Standard
22053 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
22054 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
22055 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22064 would then see the hyphen
22065 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22069 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22072 as a line break possibility.
22073 A line break at this point would look ugly.
22074 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
22076 \change_deleted 177693 1654619800
22078 \change_inserted 177693 1654619804
22083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22084 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
22086 \change_deleted 177693 1654619809
22088 \change_inserted 177693 1654619812
22093 ) or put it into a makebox as described in
22094 \change_inserted -584632292 1697421188
22099 Prevent Hyphenation
22104 \begin_inset space ~
22112 \begin_layout Subsection
22114 \begin_inset Index idx
22119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22128 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22129 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
22130 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22132 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
22139 \begin_layout Standard
22140 When \SpecialChar LyX
22141 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
22142 to generate the final version of your document,
22144 automatically distinguishes between words,
22149 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22152 appropriate amount of space.
22153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22156 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
22157 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
22160 \begin_layout Standard
22162 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
22164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22175 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
22176 it's the end of a sentence;
22177 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
22178 it's an abbreviation.
22181 \begin_layout Standard
22182 Here are some examples of
22186 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
22189 \begin_layout Itemize
22194 \begin_layout Itemize
22199 \begin_layout Standard
22200 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
22203 \begin_layout Itemize
22205 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22209 this is too much space!
22212 \begin_layout Itemize
22217 \begin_layout Standard
22218 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
22221 \begin_layout Standard
22222 To fix this problem,
22223 use one of the following:
22226 \begin_layout Enumerate
22230 \begin_inset space ~
22235 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
22236 \begin_inset space ~
22240 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
22242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22244 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
22250 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
22252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22254 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
22262 \begin_inset Index idx
22267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 \begin_layout Enumerate
22290 \begin_inset space ~
22295 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
22296 \begin_inset space ~
22300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22302 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
22308 \begin_inset Index idx
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22315 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22332 \begin_layout Enumerate
22336 \begin_inset space ~
22340 \begin_inset space ~
22344 \begin_inset space ~
22351 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22353 \begin_inset space ~
22358 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
22359 This function is also bound to
22362 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
22368 \begin_layout Standard
22369 With the corrections,
22370 our earlier examples look like this:
22373 \begin_layout Itemize
22375 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22379 \begin_inset space \space{}
22382 this is too much space!
22385 \begin_layout Itemize
22386 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
22390 \begin_layout Standard
22391 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
22392 If your language is such a language,
22393 you don't need to worry,
22394 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
22395 will take care of this.
22398 \begin_layout Standard
22399 For those that do need to bother,
22400 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
22404 \begin_inset space ~
22410 feature described in the section
22412 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
22417 Additional Features
22422 \begin_layout Subsubsection
22424 \begin_inset Index idx
22429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 \begin_inset Index idx
22451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22470 \begin_layout Standard
22472 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
22474 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
22475 and use a closing mark at the end.
22478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22486 The keyboard character,
22492 generates this automatically.
22495 \begin_layout Standard
22496 You can specify what character the
22500 key produces by using the submenu
22506 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22510 \begin_inset Index idx
22515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22531 dialog and switching the
22535 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
22536 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
22538 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
22540 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
22544 \begin_inset space ~
22550 \begin_layout Labeling
22551 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22563 \begin_inset space ~
22567 \begin_inset space ~
22571 \begin_inset Quotes els
22575 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22589 \begin_inset Quotes els
22593 \begin_inset Quotes ers
22596 quotation marks (as common,
22598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22605 \begin_layout Labeling
22606 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22609 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22613 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22617 \begin_inset space ~
22621 \begin_inset space ~
22625 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22629 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22635 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22639 \begin_inset Quotes sld
22643 \begin_inset Quotes sls
22647 \begin_inset Quotes srs
22650 quotation marks (as common,
22652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22659 \begin_layout Labeling
22660 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22663 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22667 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22671 \begin_inset space ~
22675 \begin_inset space ~
22679 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22683 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22689 \begin_inset Quotes gld
22693 \begin_inset Quotes grd
22697 \begin_inset Quotes gls
22701 \begin_inset Quotes grs
22704 quotation marks (as common,
22706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22713 \begin_layout Labeling
22714 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22717 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22721 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22725 \begin_inset space ~
22729 \begin_inset space ~
22733 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22737 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22743 \begin_inset Quotes pld
22747 \begin_inset Quotes prd
22751 \begin_inset Quotes pls
22755 \begin_inset Quotes prs
22758 quotation marks (as common,
22760 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22767 \begin_layout Labeling
22768 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22771 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22775 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22779 \begin_inset space ~
22783 \begin_inset space ~
22787 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22791 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22797 \begin_inset Quotes cld
22801 \begin_inset Quotes crd
22805 \begin_inset Quotes cls
22809 \begin_inset Quotes crs
22812 quotation marks (as common,
22814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22821 \begin_layout Labeling
22822 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22825 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22829 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22833 \begin_inset space ~
22837 \begin_inset space ~
22841 \begin_inset Quotes als
22845 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22851 \begin_inset Quotes ald
22855 \begin_inset Quotes ard
22859 \begin_inset Quotes als
22863 \begin_inset Quotes ars
22866 quotation marks (as common,
22868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22875 \begin_layout Labeling
22876 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22879 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22883 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22887 \begin_inset space ~
22891 \begin_inset space ~
22895 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22899 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22905 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22909 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
22913 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22917 \begin_inset Quotes qls
22920 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
22923 \begin_layout Labeling
22924 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22927 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22931 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22935 \begin_inset space ~
22939 \begin_inset space ~
22943 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22947 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22953 \begin_inset Quotes bld
22957 \begin_inset Quotes brd
22961 \begin_inset Quotes bls
22965 \begin_inset Quotes brs
22968 quotation marks (as common,
22970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
22977 \begin_layout Labeling
22978 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
22981 \begin_inset Quotes fld
22985 \begin_inset Quotes frd
22989 \begin_inset space ~
22993 \begin_inset space ~
22997 \begin_inset Quotes fls
23001 \begin_inset Quotes frs
23007 \begin_inset Quotes fld
23011 \begin_inset Quotes frd
23015 \begin_inset Quotes fls
23019 \begin_inset Quotes frs
23022 quotation marks (as common,
23024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23031 \begin_layout Labeling
23032 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23035 \begin_inset Quotes ild
23039 \begin_inset Quotes ird
23043 \begin_inset space ~
23047 \begin_inset space ~
23051 \begin_inset Quotes ils
23055 \begin_inset Quotes irs
23061 \begin_inset Quotes ild
23065 \begin_inset Quotes ird
23069 \begin_inset Quotes ils
23073 \begin_inset Quotes irs
23076 quotation marks (another style common in France)
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23081 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
23082 since these look identical to the inner marks.
23083 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
23091 \begin_layout Labeling
23092 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23095 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23099 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23103 \begin_inset space ~
23107 \begin_inset space ~
23111 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23115 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23121 \begin_inset Quotes rld
23125 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
23129 \begin_inset Quotes rls
23133 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
23136 quotation marks (as common,
23138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23145 \begin_layout Labeling
23146 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23149 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23153 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23157 \begin_inset space ~
23161 \begin_inset space ~
23165 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23169 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23175 \begin_inset Quotes wld
23179 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
23183 \begin_inset Quotes wls
23187 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
23190 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
23191 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
23195 \begin_layout Labeling
23196 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23198 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
23201 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23205 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23209 \begin_inset space ~
23213 \begin_inset space ~
23217 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23221 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23229 \begin_inset Quotes pld
23237 \begin_inset Quotes prd
23245 \begin_inset Quotes ald
23253 \begin_inset Quotes ard
23258 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23263 \begin_layout Labeling
23264 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23265 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23273 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23279 \begin_inset space ~
23283 \begin_inset space ~
23289 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23297 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23301 \begin_inset Quotes jld
23305 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
23309 \begin_inset Quotes jls
23313 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
23316 quotation marks (as common,
23318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23328 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
23329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23331 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
23337 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23345 \begin_layout Labeling
23346 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23347 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23355 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23361 \begin_inset space ~
23365 \begin_inset space ~
23371 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23379 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23383 \begin_inset Quotes kld
23387 \begin_inset Quotes krd
23391 \begin_inset Quotes kls
23395 \begin_inset Quotes krs
23398 quotation marks (as common,
23400 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23404 in North Korea and China)
23405 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23407 \begin_inset script superscript
23409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23411 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
23412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23414 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
23430 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23436 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
23442 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963146
23446 \begin_layout Labeling
23447 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
23449 \change_inserted 1064312605 1690963188
23452 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23456 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23460 \begin_inset space ~
23464 \begin_inset space ~
23468 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23472 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23478 \begin_inset Quotes dld
23484 \begin_inset Quotes drd
23490 \begin_inset Quotes dls
23496 \begin_inset Quotes drs
23501 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
23506 \begin_layout Standard
23507 Inner quotation marks
23511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 In many writing cultures,
23513 these are single quotation marks.
23514 But as the British and French styles show,
23515 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
23516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23523 does not necessarily mean
23524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23532 This is why we call them
23533 \begin_inset Quotes els
23537 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23545 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23553 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
23555 \begin_inset Quotes els
23559 \begin_inset Quotes ers
23562 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
23565 arg "quote-insert inner"
23570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23576 \begin_layout Standard
23578 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
23580 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
23581 even if the document-wide style changes.
23582 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
23583 If you check the setting
23585 Use dynamic quotation marks
23589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
23590 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
23595 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
23596 they appear in a special color).
23597 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
23598 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
23599 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23603 if your publisher requests a different style).
23606 \begin_layout Standard
23607 Individual quotation marks (i.
23608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
23612 their level [inner,
23616 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
23619 \begin_layout Subsection
23621 \begin_inset Index idx
23626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23628 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23643 \begin_inset Index idx
23648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
23653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23667 name "subsec:Ligatures"
23674 \begin_layout Standard
23675 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
23676 These groups are known as
23681 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
23682 knows about ligatures,
23683 your documents will contain them too in the output.
23684 Here are the standard ligatures:
23687 \begin_layout Itemize
23691 \begin_layout Itemize
23695 \begin_layout Itemize
23699 \begin_layout Itemize
23703 \begin_layout Itemize
23707 \begin_layout Standard
23708 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
23711 \begin_layout Standard
23713 you don't want a ligature in a word.
23714 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
23716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23723 it looks really weird in compound words,
23725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23740 To break a ligature,
23743 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23744 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23746 \begin_inset space ~
23753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23764 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23781 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
23783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23789 \begin_layout Subsection
23791 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
23793 \begin_inset Index idx
23798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23818 \begin_layout Standard
23821 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23822 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
23827 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
23830 \begin_layout Description
23832 The name of the game.
23835 \begin_layout Description
23837 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
23841 \begin_layout Description
23843 The \SpecialChar TeX
23844 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
23848 \begin_layout Description
23849 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
23850 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
23854 \begin_layout Standard
23855 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23861 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
23865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23869 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
23870 world to give programs geek version numbers.
23871 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
23872 converges to the number
23873 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
23877 The actual version is
23878 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23887 the previous one was
23888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23899 \begin_layout Subsection
23901 \begin_inset Index idx
23906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23908 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 \begin_layout Standard
23926 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
23927 As you can see in the example below,
23928 it looks better when the space is smaller.
23930 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23934 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23937 for units use the menu
23939 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23940 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
23942 \begin_inset space ~
23950 arg "space-insert thin"
23956 \begin_layout Standard
23957 Here is an example to show the differences:
23960 \begin_layout Standard
23961 \begin_inset Tabular
23962 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
23963 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23964 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23965 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23972 \begin_inset space ~
23976 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
23984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23988 space between number and unit
23995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
23998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
24004 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
24012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
24015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24016 half space between number and unit
24029 \begin_layout Subsection
24031 \begin_inset Index idx
24036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24055 \begin_layout Standard
24056 In the early days of word processors,
24057 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
24058 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
24059 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
24060 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
24061 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
24062 These bits of text became known as
24073 \begin_layout Standard
24076 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
24077 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
24078 But what about widows and orphans,
24079 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
24080 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
24081 governing page breaks,
24082 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
24083 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
24084 you can add the commands
24085 \begin_inset Newline newline
24093 \begin_inset Newline newline
24101 \begin_inset Newline newline
24104 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24105 preamble of your document to avoid them.
24106 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
24108 \begin_inset space ~
24112 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24114 key "latexcompanion"
24120 \begin_inset space ~
24124 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
24131 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
24132 's page break mechanism.
24135 \begin_layout Chapter
24139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24141 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
24148 \begin_layout Standard
24149 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24152 \begin_inset space ~
24158 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24161 \begin_layout Section
24163 \begin_inset Index idx
24168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24175 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24184 \begin_layout Standard
24186 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
24189 \begin_layout Description
24192 \begin_inset space ~
24195 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
24196 \begin_inset Newline newline
24200 \begin_inset Note Note
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
24212 \begin_layout Description
24213 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
24214 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
24217 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
24218 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
24220 \begin_inset space ~
24226 \begin_inset Newline newline
24230 \begin_inset Note Comment
24233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24234 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
24243 \begin_layout Description
24245 \begin_inset space ~
24248 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
24250 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
24252 \begin_inset space ~
24258 \begin_inset Newline newline
24262 \begin_inset Newline newline
24266 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24275 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
24276 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
24281 of a comment that appears in the output.
24287 \begin_inset Newline newline
24291 \begin_inset Newline newline
24294 As you can see in the example,
24295 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
24298 \begin_layout Standard
24299 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
24307 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24311 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
24314 \begin_layout Section
24316 \begin_inset Index idx
24321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24328 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24330 name "sec:Footnotes"
24337 \begin_layout Standard
24339 uses boxes to display footnotes:
24340 When you insert a footnote using the menu
24342 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24345 or the toolbar button
24348 arg "footnote-insert"
24362 \begin_inset Graphics
24363 filename clipart/footnote.png
24372 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24373 's representation of your footnote.
24383 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24407 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
24408 Clicking on the box label again will close
24421 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
24422 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
24437 \begin_layout Standard
24438 Here is an example footnote:
24446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24447 To close a footnote,
24448 click on the footnote box label.
24456 \begin_layout Standard
24457 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
24458 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
24459 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
24460 according to the document class.
24462 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
24463 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
24469 ey are described in the
24472 \begin_inset space ~
24480 \begin_layout Section
24482 \begin_inset Index idx
24487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24496 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
24503 \begin_layout Standard
24504 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
24506 When you insert a margin note via the menu
24508 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24510 \begin_inset space ~
24515 or the toolbar button
24518 arg "marginalnote-insert"
24538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24545 appearing within your text.
24546 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
24547 's representation of your margin
24556 \begin_layout Standard
24557 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
24561 \begin_inset Marginal
24564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24566 This is a marginal note.
24574 \begin_layout Standard
24575 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
24576 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
24577 right on odd pages.
24580 \begin_layout Standard
24581 For further information about marginal notes see the section
24584 \begin_inset space ~
24592 \begin_inset space ~
24600 \begin_layout Section
24601 Graphics and Images
24602 \begin_inset Index idx
24607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24614 \begin_inset Index idx
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24628 name "sec:Graphics"
24635 \begin_layout Standard
24636 To insert an image in your document,
24637 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
24640 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
24645 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24649 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
24652 \begin_layout Standard
24653 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
24658 tab allows you to choose your image file.
24659 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
24660 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
24661 \begin_inset space ~
24665 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24667 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
24675 \begin_layout Standard
24680 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
24681 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
24684 \begin_inset space ~
24688 \begin_inset space ~
24697 \begin_inset space ~
24701 \begin_inset space ~
24705 \begin_inset space ~
24710 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
24711 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
24718 \begin_layout Standard
24722 \begin_inset space ~
24726 \begin_inset space ~
24731 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
24732 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
24734 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
24739 \begin_inset space ~
24744 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
24745 only a frame with the image size is printed.
24748 \begin_layout Standard
24749 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
24750 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
24751 This is an example image within a separate,
24752 horizontally centered paragraph:
24755 \begin_layout Standard
24757 \begin_inset Graphics
24758 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
24766 \begin_layout Standard
24767 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
24768 you have to put the image into a float,
24770 \begin_inset space ~
24774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24776 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
24784 \begin_layout Subsection
24786 \begin_inset Index idx
24791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24793 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
24796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24810 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
24817 \begin_layout Standard
24818 You can insert images in any known file format.
24819 But as we explained in section
24820 \begin_inset space ~
24824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24826 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24832 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
24834 therefore uses the program
24838 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
24839 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
24840 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
24841 \begin_inset space ~
24845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24847 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
24855 \begin_layout Standard
24856 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
24859 \begin_layout Description
24861 \begin_inset space ~
24864 images consist of pixel values,
24865 often in a compressed form.
24866 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
24867 Well-known bitmap image formats are
24868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24871 Graphics Interchange Format
24872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24889 \begin_inset Index idx
24894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24896 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24915 Portable Network Graphics
24916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24933 \begin_inset Index idx
24938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24940 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24959 Joint Photographic Experts Group
24960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24985 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24989 \begin_inset Index idx
24994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
24999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25013 \begin_layout Description
25015 \begin_inset space ~
25018 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
25019 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
25020 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
25021 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
25022 \begin_inset Newline newline
25025 Scalable image formats can be
25026 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25029 Scalable Vector Graphics
25030 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25047 \begin_inset Index idx
25052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25054 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25073 Encapsulated PostScript
25074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25091 \begin_inset Index idx
25096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25098 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
25101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25117 Portable Document Format
25118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25123 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25135 \begin_inset Index idx
25140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25156 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
25157 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
25161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25162 In the case of PDF,
25163 the original image is additionally compressed.
25171 \begin_layout Standard
25172 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
25180 \begin_layout Subsection
25181 Grouping of Image Settings
25182 \begin_inset Index idx
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25189 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25206 \begin_layout Standard
25207 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
25208 Images within such a group share their settings,
25209 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
25210 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
25213 \begin_layout Standard
25214 A new group can be set by pressing the button
25217 \begin_inset space ~
25221 \begin_inset space ~
25233 \begin_inset space ~
25237 \begin_inset space ~
25243 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
25246 \begin_layout Section
25248 \begin_inset Index idx
25253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25260 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25269 \begin_layout Standard
25270 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
25273 arg "tabular-insert"
25278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25282 A dialog will appear,
25283 asking you for the number of rows and columns
25284 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
25286 and you can select a specific (border) style
25289 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
25290 This separation appears due to a double line:
25291 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
25292 Here is an example table:
25295 \begin_layout Standard
25297 \begin_inset Tabular
25298 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
25299 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25300 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25301 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25302 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25303 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25497 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
25501 \begin_layout Standard
25503 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
25504 This corresponds to the
25505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25512 table style listed in the style selection.
25515 \begin_layout Standard
25517 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
25518 Other available styles include:
25521 \begin_layout Itemize
25523 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
25525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25532 which looks line the above table,
25533 but without the first row being separated via double line,
25536 \begin_layout Itemize
25538 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
25539 a border-less table with no lines at all,
25542 \begin_layout Itemize
25544 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
25546 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25550 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25553 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and bold top/bottom lines (see
25564 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
25565 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last line.
25570 \begin_layout Standard
25572 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
25573 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar button can be changed in
25575 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25576 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
25580 So if the default style above is not the one you need,
25581 you should alter this setting.
25584 \begin_layout Subsection
25588 \begin_layout Standard
25589 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
25591 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
25595 This brings up the table dialog.
25596 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
25597 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
25598 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
25599 This means that if you select more cells,
25600 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
25603 \begin_layout Standard
25604 In addition to the table dialog,
25608 \begin_inset space ~
25613 helps you in setting table properties.
25614 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
25617 \begin_layout Standard
25621 \begin_inset space ~
25626 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
25627 If you add a row or column,
25628 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
25629 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
25630 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
25632 \begin_inset space ~
25636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25638 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
25646 \begin_layout Standard
25647 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
25656 This will merge the cells to
25661 spread over more than one column/row.
25662 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
25663 so that the alignment,
25665 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
25666 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
25669 \begin_layout Standard
25671 \begin_inset Tabular
25672 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
25673 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
25674 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25675 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
25676 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
25677 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25688 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25697 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25773 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25808 \begin_layout Standard
25809 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
25810 -arguments for the table.
25811 They are necessary for special table formatting,
25812 such as the multirow cells,
25813 explained in the chapter
25820 \begin_inset space ~
25826 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
25827 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
25828 but are visible in the output.
25831 \begin_layout Standard
25832 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25841 Most DVI-viewers are
25845 able to display rotations.
25853 \begin_layout Standard
25858 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
25863 adds lines for all cell borders.
25866 \begin_layout Subsection
25868 \begin_inset Index idx
25873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25875 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
25878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25890 \begin_inset Index idx
25895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25904 \begin_layout Standard
25905 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
25906 you can use the option
25909 \begin_inset space ~
25913 \begin_inset space ~
25921 \begin_inset space ~
25926 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
25927 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
25930 \begin_layout Description
25936 The current row and all rows above,
25937 that don't have any special options defined,
25938 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
25939 Except for the first page,
25943 \begin_inset space ~
25951 \begin_layout Description
25955 \begin_inset space ~
25961 The current row and all rows above,
25962 that don't have any special options defined,
25963 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
25966 \begin_layout Description
25972 The current row and all rows below,
25973 that don't have any special options defined,
25974 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
25975 except for the last page,
25979 \begin_inset space ~
25987 \begin_layout Description
25991 \begin_inset space ~
25997 The current row and all rows below,
25998 that don't have any special options defined,
25999 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
26002 \begin_layout Description
26004 The first row is reset as a single column.
26005 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
26007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26011 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
26014 \begin_inset space ~
26022 \begin_layout Standard
26023 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
26024 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
26025 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
26026 the others will be defined as
26032 first means first in this order:
26037 \begin_inset space ~
26051 \begin_inset space ~
26057 see the following longtable to see how it works:
26060 \begin_layout Standard
26062 \begin_inset Tabular
26063 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
26064 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
26065 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
26066 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26067 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26068 <row endfirsthead="true">
26069 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26075 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
26080 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26089 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26099 <row endfirsthead="true">
26100 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26111 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26120 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26132 <row endhead="true">
26133 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26144 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26153 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26163 <row endhead="true">
26164 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26175 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26184 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26196 <row endfoot="true">
26197 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26208 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26217 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26248 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
26987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27190 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27199 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
27202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27208 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27219 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27250 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27312 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27343 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27374 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27405 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27436 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27467 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27498 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27529 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27560 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27591 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27622 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27653 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27684 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27715 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27746 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27777 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27808 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27839 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27870 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27902 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27933 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27944 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27964 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
27978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27995 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28026 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28057 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28088 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28099 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28119 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28150 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
28164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28180 <row endlastfoot="true">
28181 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28192 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
28195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28201 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28218 \begin_layout Subsection
28220 \begin_inset Index idx
28225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28227 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28242 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28244 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
28251 \begin_layout Standard
28252 A table cell can contain text,
28256 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
28257 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
28258 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
28264 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
28267 \begin_layout Standard
28268 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
28269 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
28270 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
28274 \begin_layout Standard
28276 \begin_inset Tabular
28277 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
28278 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28279 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28280 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
28281 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28301 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28370 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28426 This is longer now.
28431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28482 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
28483 This is longer now.
28488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28514 \begin_layout Standard
28515 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
28516 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
28520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28521 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
28526 Selection with the mouse or with
28530 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
28531 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
28534 \begin_layout Section
28536 \begin_inset Index idx
28541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28548 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28557 \begin_layout Subsection
28561 \begin_layout Standard
28562 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
28563 which doesn't have a fixed location.
28565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28572 forward or backward a page or two,
28573 to wherever it fits best.
28581 \begin_inset space ~
28587 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
28590 \begin_layout Standard
28591 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
28592 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
28593 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
28594 every float can be referenced in the text.
28595 Floats are therefore numbered.
28596 Referencing is described in section
28597 \begin_inset space ~
28601 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28603 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28611 \begin_layout Standard
28615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28619 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
28620 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
28621 After the label you can insert the caption text.
28622 \begin_inset Index idx
28627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28629 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28643 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
28644 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
28645 -document readable,
28646 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
28647 A closed float box looks like this:
28649 \begin_inset Graphics
28650 filename clipart/float.png
28655 – a gray button with a red label.
28658 \begin_layout Standard
28659 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
28660 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
28663 \begin_layout Subsection
28665 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28667 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
28672 \begin_inset Index idx
28677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28679 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
28682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28696 \begin_layout Standard
28698 \begin_inset space ~
28702 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28704 reference "fig:A-star-in"
28709 was created using the menu
28711 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28712 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
28718 arg "float-insert figure"
28722 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
28724 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28730 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
28734 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
28736 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28738 \begin_inset space ~
28746 arg "layout-paragraph"
28752 \begin_layout Standard
28753 \begin_inset Float figure
28760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28762 \begin_inset Graphics
28763 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
28772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28773 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28776 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28778 name "fig:A-star-in"
28795 \begin_layout Standard
28796 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
28797 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
28799 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28808 ) and refer to it using the menu
28810 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28816 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28820 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
28821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28830 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28831 will reposition the floats in the final document,
28833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28837 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28841 For more about cross-references,
28843 \begin_inset space ~
28847 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28849 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28857 \begin_layout Standard
28858 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
28859 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
28860 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
28861 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
28862 \begin_inset space ~
28866 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28868 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28875 \begin_inset space ~
28879 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28881 reference "fig:Two-images"
28886 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
28887 You can also set the images one below the other.
28889 \begin_inset space ~
28893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28895 reference "fig:Undefinable"
28901 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28903 reference "fig:Star"
28908 are the subfigures.
28911 \begin_layout Standard
28912 \begin_inset Float figure
28919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28920 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28924 \begin_inset Float figure
28931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28932 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28937 name "fig:Undefinable"
28949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28950 \begin_inset Graphics
28951 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
28963 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
28967 \begin_inset Float figure
28974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28975 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28993 \begin_inset Graphics
28994 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
29006 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29013 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29016 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29018 name "fig:Two-images"
29035 \begin_layout Subsection
29037 \begin_inset Index idx
29042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29044 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29061 \begin_layout Standard
29062 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
29064 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29065 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
29068 or the toolbar button
29071 arg "float-insert table"
29075 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures and that the label begins with “tab:”.
29077 \begin_inset space ~
29081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29083 reference "tab:Table-float"
29091 \begin_layout Standard
29092 \begin_inset Float table
29099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29100 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29103 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29105 name "tab:Table-float"
29117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29119 \begin_inset Tabular
29120 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
29121 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29123 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29124 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29251 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
29259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
29262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29272 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29275 \end{array}\right]$
29283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29296 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
29317 \begin_layout Subsection
29319 \begin_inset Index idx
29324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29326 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29343 \begin_layout Standard
29345 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
29346 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
29347 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
29348 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
29355 \begin_inset space ~
29363 \begin_layout Section
29365 \begin_inset Index idx
29370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29379 \begin_layout Standard
29381 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
29384 all the usual rules of indentation,
29387 \begin_inset space \space{}
29393 \begin_layout Standard
29394 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
29395 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
29397 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29401 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
29404 \begin_layout Standard
29406 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29416 height_special "totalheight"
29421 backgroundcolor "none"
29424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29427 This is a minipage.
29428 The text is set in an italic style.
29431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29434 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
29442 \begin_layout Standard
29443 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29446 If you place two minipages side-by-side,
29451 as described in section
29452 \begin_inset space ~
29456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29458 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
29464 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
29470 \begin_layout Standard
29471 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29481 height_special "totalheight"
29486 backgroundcolor "none"
29489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29490 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29491 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29497 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
29501 \begin_inset Box Frameless
29511 height_special "totalheight"
29516 backgroundcolor "none"
29519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29520 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
29521 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
29529 \begin_layout Standard
29530 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29536 \begin_layout Standard
29537 When you right-click on a minipage box,
29538 you can transform the box to another box type.
29539 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
29546 \begin_inset space ~
29554 \begin_layout Chapter
29555 Mathematical Formulas
29556 \begin_inset Index idx
29561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29568 \begin_inset Index idx
29573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29575 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
29578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29592 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
29605 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
29608 \begin_layout Section
29610 \begin_inset Index idx
29615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29617 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29635 To create a math formula,
29636 you can just click on the toolbar icon
29649 That will create a little blue rectangle,
29650 with purple markers around its corners.
29651 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
29652 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
29653 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
29655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29661 \begin_layout Standard
29662 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
29665 \begin_inset space ~
29671 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
29674 \begin_layout Standard
29675 There are two main types of formulas,
29676 inline formulas and display formulas.
29677 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
29681 \begin_layout Standard
29682 This is a line with an inline formula
29683 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
29689 \begin_layout Standard
29690 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
29692 \begin_inset Formula
29699 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
29702 \begin_layout Standard
29704 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
29708 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29722 followed by a space,
29723 in a formula will create the Greek letter
29724 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
29728 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
29731 \begin_inset space ~
29739 \begin_layout Subsection
29740 Navigating in Formulas
29741 \begin_inset Index idx
29746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29748 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29765 \begin_layout Standard
29766 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
29768 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
29769 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
29774 will leave a formula construct (a square root
29775 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
29780 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
29785 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
29788 \end{array}\right]$
29796 will leave the formula,
29797 placing the cursor after the formula.
29802 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
29804 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
29807 \begin_layout Standard
29813 printed in this document as
29814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29818 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29826 seems to do nothing in a formula,
29827 since it does not add a space between characters,
29828 but it does exit a nested structure.
29830 you have to be careful about using
29837 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
29846 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29856 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29860 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
29866 since in the latter case only the
29869 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
29874 will be under the square root sign:
29876 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
29882 \begin_layout Standard
29883 You can leave many parts of a formula,
29885 partially filled in,
29887 \begin_inset Formula
29889 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
29898 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
29899 or a subscript with nothing in it,
29900 the results will be unpredictable,
29901 but most constructs don't mind.
29904 \begin_layout Subsection
29908 \begin_layout Standard
29909 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
29910 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
29915 and a cursor movement key to select text.
29916 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
29918 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
29919 That text can then be cut or copied,
29920 and then pasted within any formula,
29921 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
29925 \begin_layout Subsection
29926 Exponents and Subscripts
29927 \begin_inset Index idx
29932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29934 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29949 \begin_inset Index idx
29954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29956 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
29959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29973 \begin_layout Standard
29974 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
29977 arg "math-superscript"
29983 arg "math-subscript"
29987 but it is often much easier to use a command.
29989 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
29996 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30006 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
30013 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
30018 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
30025 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30031 If you use characters in the superscript,
30032 that could be accented with the circumflex
30033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30041 you have to use an extra
30045 to separate the circumflex and the character.
30048 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
30055 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30061 Subscripts are similar:
30063 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
30070 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30078 \begin_layout Subsection
30080 \begin_inset Index idx
30085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30087 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30104 \begin_layout Standard
30105 Create a fraction either with the command
30111 or by using the icon
30114 arg "math-insert \\frac"
30120 \begin_inset space ~
30126 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
30127 The cursor is above the fraction line.
30128 To move it to the bottom,
30140 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
30141 as this example shows:
30142 \begin_inset Formula
30144 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
30147 \end{array}\right)}\right]
30155 \begin_layout Subsection
30157 \begin_inset Index idx
30162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30164 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30181 \begin_layout Standard
30182 Roots can be created using the
30185 \begin_inset space ~
30193 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
30199 arg "math-insert \\root"
30221 you can produce roots of higher orders,
30229 always produces a square root.
30232 \begin_layout Subsection
30233 Operators with Limits
30234 \begin_inset Index idx
30239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30241 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30256 \begin_inset Index idx
30261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30263 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30278 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30280 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30289 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
30293 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
30296 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
30297 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
30298 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
30299 directly after the symbol.
30300 The sum operator will automatically place its
30301 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30305 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30308 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
30309 and to the side in inline formulas,
30311 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
30316 \begin_inset Formula
30318 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
30325 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30329 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
30330 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
30332 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30333 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
30335 \begin_inset space ~
30339 \begin_inset space ~
30353 \begin_layout Standard
30354 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
30355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30359 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30364 \begin_inset Index idx
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30371 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30386 \begin_inset Formula
30388 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
30393 which will place the
30394 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
30398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30406 In inline formulas it looks like this:
30408 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
30414 \begin_layout Standard
30415 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
30422 Have a look at section
30423 \begin_inset space ~
30427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30429 reference "subsec:Functions"
30434 for an explanation of function macros.
30437 \begin_layout Subsection
30439 \begin_inset Index idx
30444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30446 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30463 \begin_layout Standard
30464 Most math symbols can be found in the
30467 \begin_inset space ~
30472 under one of several categories;
30493 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
30496 \begin_layout Standard
30497 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30498 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
30499 you don't have to use the
30502 \begin_inset space ~
30508 you can type the command directly into the formula.
30510 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
30513 \begin_layout Subsection
30515 \begin_inset Index idx
30520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30522 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30539 \begin_layout Standard
30540 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
30546 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
30552 \begin_inset space ~
30560 arg "math-insert \\space"
30564 This generates a small space,
30565 and shows a small marker on the screen.
30573 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
30576 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
30578 \begin_inset Graphics
30579 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
30584 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
30585 With every space enter the size will be changed.
30586 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
30588 because they are negative spaces.
30589 Here are two examples:
30592 \begin_layout Standard
30603 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
30609 \begin_layout Standard
30620 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
30626 \begin_layout Subsection
30628 \begin_inset Index idx
30633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30635 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30650 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30652 name "subsec:Functions"
30659 \begin_layout Standard
30663 \begin_inset space ~
30668 contains under the button
30671 arg "math-insert \\functions"
30674 a number of function macros,
30676 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
30681 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
30690 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
30697 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
30699 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
30703 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
30709 \begin_layout Standard
30710 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
30712 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
30716 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
30722 \begin_layout Standard
30723 For some mathematical objects,
30725 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
30726 as described in section
30727 \begin_inset space ~
30731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30733 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
30741 \begin_layout Subsection
30743 \begin_inset Index idx
30748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30750 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
30753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30767 \begin_layout Standard
30768 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
30769 This may depend on your keyboard,
30770 or the bindings file you use.
30771 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
30775 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30778 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
30779 Our example is entered by typing
30784 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
30791 \begin_inset space ~
30795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30797 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
30802 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
30805 \begin_layout Standard
30806 \begin_inset Float table
30813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30814 \begin_inset Caption Standard
30816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30819 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
30823 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
30831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30833 \begin_inset Tabular
30834 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
30835 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
30836 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30837 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30838 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
30840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30922 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
30932 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
30966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30976 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
30986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
30989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31030 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
31040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31084 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
31094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31138 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
31148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31192 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
31202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31246 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
31256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31300 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
31310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31354 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
31364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31399 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
31420 \begin_layout Standard
31421 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
31424 \begin_inset space ~
31432 arg "math-insert \\hat"
31436 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
31439 \begin_layout Section
31440 Brackets and Delimiters
31441 \begin_inset Index idx
31446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31448 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31463 \begin_inset Index idx
31468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31470 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31485 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31487 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
31498 using just the keys
31503 But if you want to surround a large structure,
31504 like a matrix or a fraction,
31505 or if you have several layers of brackets,
31506 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
31509 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31514 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
31515 \begin_inset Formula
31517 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
31525 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
31527 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
31530 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
31533 and the expression on the right was entered using the
31539 \begin_inset Formula
31541 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
31549 \begin_layout Standard
31550 If you use the delimiter icon,
31552 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
31555 \begin_layout Standard
31556 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
31557 If you use the option
31560 \begin_inset space ~
31566 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
31567 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
31569 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
31575 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
31576 with a dotted line,
31577 but nothing will be printed.
31580 \begin_layout Standard
31581 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
31582 like a square root,
31583 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
31584 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
31589 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
31592 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
31594 to insert a pair of parentheses,
31595 select the structure and enter
31598 arg "math-delim ( )"
31604 \begin_layout Section
31605 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
31606 \begin_inset Index idx
31611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31613 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31628 \begin_inset Index idx
31633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31635 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31650 \begin_inset Index idx
31655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31657 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31661 Multi-line Equations
31674 \begin_layout Standard
31675 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
31679 \begin_inset space ~
31687 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
31691 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
31692 Here is an example:
31693 \begin_inset Formula
31695 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
31704 The parentheses aren't automatic,
31705 but you can add them as described in section
31706 \begin_inset space ~
31710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31712 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
31718 When you construct the matrix,
31719 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
31721 or center-justified.
31722 This alignment is set in the box
31727 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31748 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31778 for every column as default.
31781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31792 means that the first column will be left-justified,
31793 the second will be centered,
31794 and the third column will be right-justified,
31795 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
31796 The result will look like this:
31797 \begin_inset Formula
31800 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
31801 column & has & has\,right\\
31802 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
31811 \begin_layout Standard
31812 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
31815 arg "newline-insert newline"
31818 while the cursor is in the matrix.
31819 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
31821 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31824 or the math toolbar.
31827 \begin_layout Standard
31828 There are other arrays used in formulas,
31829 such as distinctions of cases.
31830 It can be created with the menu
31832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31833 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
31835 \begin_inset space ~
31847 Here is an example:
31849 \begin_inset Formula
31863 \begin_layout Standard
31864 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31867 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
31870 arg "newline-insert newline"
31874 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
31875 one for each column.
31879 arg "newline-insert newline"
31882 in a non-empty formula,
31883 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
31884 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31888 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31891 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
31892 the relation sign is in the second column,
31893 and the rest in the third column.
31894 A new row is created by every further entry of
31897 arg "newline-insert newline"
31901 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
31902 Here is an example:
31903 \begin_inset Formula
31905 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
31906 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
31911 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
31912 \begin_inset Formula
31914 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
31922 \begin_layout Standard
31923 The multi-line formula type described here is called
31930 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
31931 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
31932 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31934 reference "eq:asquared"
31940 The other types are described in section
31941 \begin_inset space ~
31945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31947 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
31955 \begin_layout Section
31956 Formula Numbering and Referencing
31957 \begin_inset Index idx
31962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31964 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31979 \begin_inset Index idx
31984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31986 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
31989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31990 Referencing formulas
32001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32003 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
32010 \begin_layout Standard
32011 To number a formula,
32012 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
32014 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32015 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32017 \begin_inset space ~
32021 \begin_inset space ~
32029 arg "math-number-toggle"
32033 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32034 within parentheses.
32035 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
32036 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
32037 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
32038 separated by a dot:
32039 \begin_inset Formula
32049 arg "math-number-toggle"
32052 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
32053 You can only number displayed formulas.
32056 \begin_layout Standard
32057 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
32060 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32061 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32063 \begin_inset space ~
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32075 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
32078 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
32079 \begin_inset Formula
32082 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
32088 To number all lines use the shortcut
32091 arg "math-number-toggle"
32097 \begin_layout Standard
32098 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32101 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
32102 A label is inserted with the menu
32104 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32113 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
32114 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
32115 It is recommended that you use the suggested
32116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32127 as the first part of the label,
32128 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
32129 We inserted in the following example the label
32130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32137 in the second line:
32138 \begin_inset Formula
32140 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
32141 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
32146 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
32147 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
32148 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
32150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32152 \begin_inset space ~
32160 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
32164 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
32165 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32166 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
32169 \begin_layout Standard
32170 This is a cross-reference to equation (
32171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32173 reference "eq:tanhExp"
32181 \begin_layout Standard
32182 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
32183 's cross-reference box are described in section
32184 \begin_inset space ~
32188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32190 reference "sec:Cross-References"
32197 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
32204 \begin_layout Section
32205 User defined math macros
32206 \begin_inset Index idx
32211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32213 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32230 \begin_layout Standard
32232 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
32233 Math macros are explained in section
32236 \begin_inset space ~
32248 \begin_layout Section
32252 \begin_layout Subsection
32254 \begin_inset Index idx
32259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32261 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32278 \begin_layout Standard
32279 The standard font for text is italic,
32280 for numbers the standard is roman.
32281 To set a font in a formula,
32285 \begin_inset space ~
32293 arg "math-insert \\font"
32297 or enter its command,
32299 \begin_inset space ~
32303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32305 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32314 \begin_layout Standard
32315 \begin_inset Float table
32322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32323 \begin_inset Caption Standard
32325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32326 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32328 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
32332 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
32340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32342 \begin_inset Tabular
32343 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
32344 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
32345 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32346 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
32348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32378 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
32386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32405 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
32413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32432 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
32440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32465 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
32473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32492 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
32500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32514 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
32515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32520 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32521 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
32529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32534 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
32546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32550 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
32558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32584 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
32592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32606 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
32607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32612 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32620 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
32628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32633 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
32645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32649 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
32657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
32660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32683 \begin_layout Standard
32684 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32693 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
32696 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
32699 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
32703 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
32723 \begin_layout Standard
32724 When you use a typeface,
32725 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
32726 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
32731 within the box will set the cursor outside,
32732 so that you have to use a
32733 \change_deleted 177693 1654619816
32735 \change_inserted 177693 1654619818
32738 space when you need a space in the box.
32739 Here is an example where
32740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32744 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32751 denotes the set of numbers:
32752 \begin_inset Formula
32754 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
32762 \begin_layout Standard
32763 The typefaces are nestable,
32764 which can cause confusion.
32777 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
32781 \begin_inset Newline newline
32784 So it is better not to use this feature.
32787 \begin_layout Standard
32788 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
32790 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
32794 \begin_inset Newline newline
32797 You can only print them emboldened using the command
32804 which works like the other typeface commands:
32806 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
32812 \begin_layout Standard
32819 works for all symbols,
32824 \begin_layout Standard
32825 A number of other font options are available as well,
32828 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32829 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
32831 \begin_inset space ~
32839 \begin_layout Subsection
32841 \begin_inset Index idx
32846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32848 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32865 \begin_layout Standard
32866 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
32868 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
32869 which is obtained using the entry
32872 \begin_inset space ~
32876 \begin_inset space ~
32884 \begin_inset space ~
32892 arg "math-insert \\font"
32896 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
32897 in black instead of blue.
32898 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
32899 Here is an example:
32900 \begin_inset Formula
32903 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
32904 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
32913 \begin_layout Subsection
32915 \begin_inset Index idx
32920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32922 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
32925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32939 \begin_layout Standard
32940 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
32941 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
32962 For most characters,
32971 are actually the same size,
32973 superscripts and subscripts,
32974 and certain other structures,
32980 Except for some operators,
32981 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
32982 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
32983 thinks are appropriate.
32984 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
32987 arg "math-insert \\style"
32991 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
32994 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
32998 which is normally in
33009 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
33013 The four styles are used in the following example:
33016 \begin_layout Standard
33017 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
33022 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
33027 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
33032 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
33038 \begin_layout Standard
33039 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
33041 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33043 \begin_inset space ~
33049 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
33051 if the base font size of the document is changed,
33052 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
33053 As an example here is a formula in the font size
33054 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33064 \begin_layout Standard
33068 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
33074 \begin_layout Section
33075 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33077 \begin_inset Index idx
33082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33089 \begin_inset Index idx
33094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33096 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33113 \begin_layout Standard
33115 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
33118 \begin_layout Subsection
33119 Enabling AMS-Support
33122 \begin_layout Standard
33123 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by
33124 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
33140 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
33141 selecting the checkbox
33144 \begin_inset space ~
33148 \begin_inset space ~
33152 \begin_inset space ~
33161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33165 \begin_inset Index idx
33170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33172 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33189 \begin_inset space ~
33195 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
33196 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
33197 -errors in formulas,
33198 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
33201 \begin_layout Subsection
33203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33205 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
33210 \begin_inset Index idx
33215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33217 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33221 Multi-line Equations
33234 \begin_layout Standard
33235 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
33236 provides a selection of different formula types.
33238 allows you to choose between
33263 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
33265 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33273 for an explanation of these formula types.
33276 \begin_layout Chapter
33280 \begin_layout Section
33282 \begin_inset Index idx
33287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33294 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33296 name "sec:Cross-References"
33303 \begin_layout Standard
33304 One of \SpecialChar LyX
33305 's strengths is cross-references.
33306 You can reference every section,
33310 and list in the document.
33311 To reference a document part,
33312 you have to insert a label into it.
33313 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
33314 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
33317 \begin_layout Enumerate
33321 \begin_layout Enumerate
33322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33324 name "enu:Second-item"
33331 \begin_layout Enumerate
33335 \begin_layout Standard
33336 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
33338 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33341 or by pressing the toolbar button
33348 A gray label box like this:
33350 \begin_inset Graphics
33351 filename clipart/label.png
33355 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
33357 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
33358 in our case the text
33359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33392 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
33394 if you insert a label into a section heading,
33395 the suggested prefix will be
33396 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33410 \begin_layout Standard
33411 To reference the item,
33412 we refer to its label using the menu
33414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33417 or the toolbar button
33420 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
33424 A gray cross-reference box like this:
33426 \begin_inset Graphics
33427 filename clipart/reference.png
33431 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
33432 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
33433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33445 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
33448 \begin_layout Standard
33449 As an alternative to
33451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33455 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
33460 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
33462 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 \begin_layout Standard
33475 Here is our cross-reference:
33477 \begin_inset space ~
33481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33483 reference "enu:Second-item"
33491 \begin_layout Standard
33492 It is recommended to use a
33493 \change_deleted 177693 1654619823
33495 \change_inserted 177693 1654619826
33502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33503 described in section
33504 \begin_inset space ~
33508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33510 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
33520 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33524 There are eight formats of cross-references:
33527 \begin_layout Description
33530 this is the default:
33532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33534 reference "fig:Two-images"
33542 \begin_layout Description
33544 prints the number within two parentheses,
33545 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
33546 especially when the reference name
33547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33556 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33558 reference "eq:tanhExp"
33566 \begin_layout Description
33568 prints the page number:
33570 \begin_inset space ~
33574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33575 LatexCommand pageref
33576 reference "fig:Two-images"
33584 \begin_layout Description
33586 \begin_inset space ~
33590 \begin_inset space ~
33594 prints the text “on page” and the page number:
33596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33597 LatexCommand vpageref
33598 reference "fig:Two-images"
33604 \begin_inset Newline newline
33607 If the label is on the same page,
33608 it prints “on this page”;
33609 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
33610 it prints “on the facing page”;
33611 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
33612 it prints “on the previous page”;
33613 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
33614 it prints “on the next page”.
33615 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
33618 \begin_layout Description
33620 \begin_inset space ~
33624 \begin_inset space ~
33628 \begin_inset space ~
33633 the text “on page” and the page number:
33635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33637 reference "fig:Two-images"
33643 \begin_inset Newline newline
33646 If the label is on the same page,
33647 this format behaves like
33654 otherwise it behaves like
33658 \begin_inset space ~
33662 \begin_inset space ~
33671 \begin_layout Description
33673 \begin_inset space ~
33677 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
33678 \begin_inset Newline newline
33682 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33691 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33701 \begin_inset Index idx
33706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33709 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33724 \begin_inset Index idx
33729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33732 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
33735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33752 \begin_inset Newline newline
33755 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
33756 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
33758 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
33762 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33763 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33771 is the default and preferred because
33775 supports only English documents.
33776 The format is specified by using the command
33780 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33789 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33790 preamble of the document.
33791 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
33792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33808 \begin_inset Newline newline
33815 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
33820 \begin_inset Newline newline
33831 predefines reference formats for all available types.
33832 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
33833 So if you want to make formatted references to,
33836 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
33842 you might do so as follows:
33843 \begin_inset Newline newline
33850 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
33851 format{prop}{Proposition
33856 \begin_inset Newline newline
33859 For more information about defining formatted references,
33860 have a look at the package documentation
33861 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33863 key "prettyref,refstyle"
33869 \begin_inset Newline newline
33880 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
33885 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
33887 \begin_inset Newline newline
33890 If you activate the option
33891 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042040
33893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33897 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
33900 Format cross-references in work area
33901 \change_deleted -712698321 1693042041
33905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33909 \change_inserted -584632292 1692991077
33912 will attempt to display the formatted reference as it would appear in output,
33915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33923 rather than just displaying the label.
33928 \begin_layout Description
33930 \begin_inset space ~
33934 prints the caption or the name of the reference:
33936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33937 LatexCommand nameref
33938 reference "fig:Two-images"
33946 \begin_layout Description
33948 \begin_inset space ~
33952 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33953 label for the reference:
33955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33956 LatexCommand labelonly
33957 reference "fig:Two-images"
33963 \begin_inset Newline newline
33966 This allows for customization,
33967 using \SpecialChar TeX
33969 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
33976 then you may want to use the
33979 \begin_inset space ~
33985 which will output only the part of the reference following the
33986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33994 This is the form needed for e.
33995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33999 \begin_inset space \space{}
34006 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34008 The varieties are adjusted in the field
34012 of the cross-reference window,
34013 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
34016 \begin_layout Standard
34017 You can only use the style
34021 to reference numbered document parts,
34022 while the reference style
34026 is always possible.
34029 \begin_layout Standard
34030 If you want to reference a section,
34031 put the label in the section heading;
34032 for floats put the label in the caption;
34033 for footnotes put the label in it.
34034 Referencing formulas is explained in section
34035 \begin_inset space ~
34039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34041 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
34049 \begin_layout Standard
34050 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
34054 \begin_inset space ~
34058 \begin_inset space ~
34063 sets the cursor before the referenced label
34064 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632729
34067 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632729
34069 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
34070 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding label
34071 \change_deleted 5863208 1686632734
34073 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
34075 \change_inserted 5863208 1686632735
34079 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
34082 \begin_inset space ~
34087 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
34088 You can also go back with the toolbar button
34091 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
34095 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
34100 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34101 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
34109 \begin_layout Standard
34110 You can change labels at any time.
34111 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to
34112 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
34114 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
34115 change them all manually
34120 \begin_layout Standard
34121 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
34122 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
34123 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
34126 \begin_layout Standard
34127 References are described in detail in the section
34138 \begin_layout Section
34139 Table of Contents and other Listings
34140 \begin_inset Index idx
34145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34152 \begin_inset Index idx
34157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
34162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34174 \begin_inset Index idx
34179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34195 \begin_layout Subsection
34197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34199 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
34206 \begin_layout Standard
34207 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
34209 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34210 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
34212 \begin_inset space ~
34216 \begin_inset space ~
34222 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
34224 If you click on it,
34230 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
34231 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
34232 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
34234 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34236 \begin_inset space ~
34241 that is described in section
34242 \begin_inset space ~
34246 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34248 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
34256 \begin_layout Standard
34257 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
34258 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
34259 as described in section
34260 \begin_inset space ~
34264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34266 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
34272 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
34274 \begin_inset space ~
34278 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34280 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
34285 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
34286 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
34289 \begin_layout Subsection
34292 Listings and Algorithms
34293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34295 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
34302 \begin_layout Standard
34305 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
34306 You can insert them via the
34308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34309 List/Contents/References
34312 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
34315 \begin_layout Section
34316 URLs and Hyperlinks
34317 \begin_inset Index idx
34322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34329 \begin_inset Index idx
34334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34343 \begin_layout Subsection
34345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34354 \begin_layout Standard
34355 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
34357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34363 \begin_layout Standard
34364 Here is an example URL:
34368 \begin_inset Flex URL
34371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34373 https://www.lyx.org
34381 \begin_layout Standard
34383 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535921
34384 You cannot change the style of the link text
34385 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535924
34389 the URL text will always be in the style
34395 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535967
34396 You can globally change the formatting by putting to
34398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34399 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34405 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34407 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536088
34413 \begin_layout Standard
34415 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536347
34439 (use whatever the current text font is).
34440 To have italicized URLs,
34444 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34446 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536274
34458 \begin_layout Standard
34460 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536203
34461 To be able to format the URL text,
34462 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
34464 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535961
34468 \begin_layout Standard
34470 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34472 \change_deleted -712698321 1676534694
34474 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34476 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535379
34477 between lines at certain characters,
34481 \begin_layout LyX-Code
34483 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535384
34494 \begin_layout Standard
34496 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535411
34497 It does not break at a hyphen (
34502 but you can change that by adding
34507 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535339
34509 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535862
34512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34513 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34514 Document Class\SpecialChar menuseparator
34515 Class Options\SpecialChar menuseparator
34519 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535861
34522 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34524 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535863
34526 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535864
34528 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34530 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535842
34531 this still does not break URLs suitably to you,
34532 a last resort is to put
34535 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34539 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535846
34543 \change_inserted -712698321 1676536760
34546 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34547 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34552 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535894
34553 in the preamble then the
34554 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535897
34556 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34558 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535899
34560 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34562 \change_deleted -712698321 1676535445
34564 \change_inserted -712698321 1676535903
34566 \change_inserted 5863208 1676462413
34567 be broken at every character.
34569 \change_deleted -712698321 1676536383
34575 \begin_layout Standard
34576 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34585 URLs must not end with a backslash,
34586 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
34595 \begin_layout Subsection
34597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34599 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
34606 \begin_layout Standard
34607 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
34609 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34612 or with the toolbar button
34619 The appearing dialog has two fields:
34629 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
34630 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
34632 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34634 name "LyX's homepage"
34635 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34641 an Email address like this:
34643 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34645 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
34646 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
34654 \change_deleted -712698321 1672058176
34658 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058271
34659 or any other valid URI (such as
34670 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
34678 \begin_layout Standard
34679 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
34680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34688 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34692 \change_inserted -712698321 1672058343
34694 but note that most PDF viewers disable such links for security reasons
34699 \begin_layout Standard
34700 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
34701 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
34702 To set the format of the link text,
34703 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
34704 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
34709 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34711 name "LyX's homepage"
34712 target "https://www.lyx.org"
34720 \begin_layout Standard
34721 The link text color can be changed,
34726 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
34728 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34729 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34733 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
34734 \begin_inset Newline newline
34742 \begin_inset Newline newline
34749 in the PDF Properties dialog.
34750 \change_inserted 5863208 1686630948
34754 \begin_layout Standard
34756 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34757 To open the link while editing in \SpecialChar LyX
34758 you can use context menu (or
34759 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813434
34761 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34765 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813424
34769 \change_inserted 5863208 1686631630
34771 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
34775 \begin_layout Section
34777 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
34779 \begin_inset Index idx
34784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34793 name "sec:Counters"
34800 \begin_layout Standard
34802 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34803 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34804 is its ability to manage counters.
34806 this is handled automatically,
34807 but there are times one wants to modify counters directly.
34808 This can be done in
34809 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
34811 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
34814 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34815 using the counter inset,
34816 which is accessible from the Edit menu.
34817 This allows one to set a counter's value;
34818 to reset it (to zero);
34822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34824 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
34825 Note that the section counter,
34827 starts with its value at zero and then is incremented to one when the first section is created.
34829 if you want the next section to be section five,
34831 then you need to set the section counter to four.
34838 to add to the value (or subtract from it,
34839 since the value added can be negative);
34841 to restore the saved value;
34842 and to print the value.
34843 These effects can also be limited to
34844 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
34846 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
34849 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34851 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output,
34853 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
34855 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
34858 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
34862 \begin_layout Standard
34864 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
34865 There are five commands you can use:
34868 \begin_layout Enumerate
34870 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
34876 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
34879 \begin_layout Enumerate
34881 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
34887 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract,
34888 if you choose a negative number)
34891 \begin_layout Enumerate
34893 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
34899 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
34902 \begin_layout Enumerate
34904 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
34907 Save value of counter:
34910 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
34913 \begin_layout Enumerate
34915 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
34918 Restore value of counter:
34921 Restores the previously saved value.
34924 \begin_layout Standard
34926 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
34927 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all those that are available in the current document class.
34932 \begin_layout Section
34934 \begin_inset Index idx
34939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34946 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34948 name "sec:Appendices"
34955 \begin_layout Standard
34956 Appendices are created with the menu
34958 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34960 \begin_inset space ~
34964 \begin_inset space ~
34970 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
34971 This part is marked with a red borderline.
34974 \begin_layout Standard
34975 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
34976 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
34977 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
34978 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
34982 \begin_layout Standard
34984 \begin_inset space ~
34988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34990 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35006 reference "subsec:Export"
35014 \begin_layout Section
35016 \begin_inset Index idx
35021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35030 name "sec:Bibliography"
35037 \begin_layout Standard
35038 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
35040 You can include a bibliography database,
35041 which is explained in sec.
35042 \begin_inset space ~
35046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35048 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35057 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
35058 using the paragraph environment
35063 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
35064 \begin_inset space ~
35068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35070 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
35076 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
35077 such as author-year citations,
35078 and if you have more than a handful of references,
35079 then you should seriously consider
35083 using a bibliography database.
35086 \begin_layout Standard
35087 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
35088 we use two bibliographies in this document,
35093 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
35095 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
35097 the database approach relieves you,
35098 amongst other things,
35099 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
35102 \begin_layout Subsection
35103 The Bibliography Environment
35104 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35106 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
35113 \begin_layout Standard
35119 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
35120 If you click on it,
35121 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
35130 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
35131 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
35132 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
35136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35138 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35141 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
35147 \begin_inset Newline newline
35151 \begin_inset Flex URL
35154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35156 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
35167 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
35169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35177 a short form of its title,
35179 \begin_inset Newline newline
35187 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
35192 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
35200 \begin_layout Standard
35201 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
35203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35206 or the toolbar button
35209 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
35213 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
35214 Select one or more keys from the list and
35224 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
35225 If you click on the box,
35226 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
35229 \begin_layout Standard
35230 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
35231 Here are two examples;
35232 the first without a label,
35233 the second with the label
35234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35244 \begin_layout Standard
35248 Companion Second Edition
35252 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35254 key "latexcompanion"
35262 \begin_layout Standard
35263 The \SpecialChar LyX
35264 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
35266 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35276 \begin_layout Standard
35277 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
35278 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35284 \begin_inset Index idx
35289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35292 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35309 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
35310 the label needs to be given the form
35311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35322 Author A and Author B(Year)
35323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35330 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
35337 \begin_inset space ~
35342 in the document settings
35343 \begin_inset Index idx
35348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35350 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35366 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
35368 \begin_inset space ~
35374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35376 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
35385 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35387 Once you have done that,
35391 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
35393 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
35396 dialog has three input fields instead of the
35415 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation reference,
35416 the second the year (without parentheses).
35417 These two are madatory.
35418 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full list (
35424 ) and in abrreviated form (
35432 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
35433 add the abbreviated form to
35437 and the full list to the optional
35445 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
35446 If specified like this,
35449 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
35450 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
35453 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35463 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35470 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between full and abbreviated list
35474 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
35475 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for the citation references.
35476 In the bibliography entry,
35477 author and year must be added manually.
35482 \begin_layout Standard
35483 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
35485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35487 \begin_inset space ~
35495 arg "layout-paragraph"
35499 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
35502 \begin_layout Subsection
35503 Bibliography databases
35504 \begin_inset Index idx
35509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35511 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35526 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35528 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
35535 \begin_layout Standard
35536 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
35540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35541 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
35542 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
35547 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
35548 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
35549 This database can be used for different documents,
35550 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
35551 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
35554 \begin_layout Standard
35555 The database is a text file with the file extension
35556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35568 containing the bibliography in a special format.
35569 The format is explained in
35570 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35577 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35579 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35581 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
35587 The file can be created using any text editor,
35588 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
35589 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
35591 \begin_inset Flex URL
35594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35596 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
35604 \begin_layout Standard
35606 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
35607 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35608 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
35609 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
35610 But it has its drawbacks,
35611 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
35612 Those are addressed by
35617 \begin_inset Index idx
35622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35625 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35640 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35641 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35652 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35654 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35655 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
35665 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
35668 \begin_layout Standard
35669 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35675 set in the document settings (menu
35677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35681 \begin_inset Index idx
35686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35688 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35714 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35722 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35723 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35725 \begin_inset Index idx
35730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35732 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35736 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35750 \begin_layout Standard
35751 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35755 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35756 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35758 \begin_inset space ~
35764 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35772 Add bibliography to TOC
35774 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
35779 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
35781 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
35786 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s),
35787 should this differ from the encoding of the document.
35792 \begin_layout Standard
35793 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35794 style file is a text file with the file extension
35795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35806 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
35807 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35808 distribution should provide several of these,
35809 and many publishers provide their own style files,
35810 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
35811 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
35812 but this is something for experts.
35816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35817 For information on how this is done,
35819 \begin_inset Newline newline
35823 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35825 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
35835 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35841 which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards Institute (DIN).
35844 \begin_layout Standard
35845 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
35848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35850 \begin_inset Index idx
35855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35857 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35872 \begin_inset Index idx
35877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35880 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
35883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35897 \begin_layout Standard
35898 Accessing a database via
35902 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35905 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
35907 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
35912 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35913 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35915 \begin_inset space ~
35921 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35922 you cannot select a
35927 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
35931 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35934 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
35936 note the following.
35941 \begin_layout Standard
35946 has two different style files:
35947 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
35948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35959 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
35960 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35971 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
35972 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
35973 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
35976 \begin_layout Standard
35981 styles are not set in the
35984 \begin_inset space ~
35990 but in the document settings.
35991 \begin_inset Index idx
35996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35998 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36013 in the dialog in the
36018 which is only visible if you use
36023 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
36024 These options are described in detail in the
36030 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36040 \begin_layout Standard
36041 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
36042 \begin_inset space ~
36046 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36048 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36060 Bibliography Processors
36063 \begin_layout Standard
36064 To generate the bibliography from a database,
36066 uses a bibliography processor,
36067 that is an external program that reads the database,
36068 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
36069 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36071 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
36072 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
36076 \begin_layout Standard
36078 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
36079 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
36080 You can do this on a general level in
36082 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36083 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36084 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36087 or for individual documents in
36089 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36090 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36094 The following variants are available by default:
36097 \begin_layout Description
36100 \begin_inset Index idx
36105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36108 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36122 developed exclusively for
36126 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36132 provides full Unicode support,
36133 unlimited memory and many specific features
36143 it is strongly recommended to use
36150 \begin_layout Description
36151 bibtex the standard;
36152 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
36154 works with all bibliography packages,
36155 although it will probably fail with
36159 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
36162 \begin_layout Description
36163 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
36169 works with all bibliography packages,
36170 although more complex
36174 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
36179 features are supported.
36182 \begin_layout Standard
36183 By default (with the
36189 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36190 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36203 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36204 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36205 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36210 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
36223 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36224 -based bibliography styles).
36225 This should suit most needs.
36228 \begin_layout Standard
36229 In Japanese documents,
36230 a specific processor is used.
36231 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
36232 (in \SpecialChar LyX
36238 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36239 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
36240 You can adjust it in
36242 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36243 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36244 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
36250 \begin_layout Standard
36251 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
36252 Before adding options,
36253 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36260 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36270 \begin_layout Subsubsection
36274 \begin_layout Standard
36276 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
36277 These are explained in detail in section
36279 Customizing Bibliographies
36283 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36288 Additional Features
36291 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
36295 \begin_layout Subsection
36297 \begin_inset Index idx
36302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36304 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36321 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
36328 \begin_layout Standard
36329 Many different citation formats are common,
36331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36335 \begin_inset space \space{}
36338 numerical citation (as
36339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36346 like in this document),
36347 alpha-numerical citations (as
36348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36355 ) or author-year citations (as
36356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36365 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
36368 \begin_layout Standard
36369 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
36372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36373 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36377 \begin_inset Index idx
36382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36384 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36398 you have a range of other options,
36399 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
36404 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36419 \begin_inset space ~
36424 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
36425 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36427 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
36435 \begin_layout Standard
36436 With a bibliography database (see
36437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36439 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36447 ) one has in contrary to the
36451 environment full access to the formatting styles.
36452 These style formats are available:
36455 \begin_layout Description
36457 \begin_inset space ~
36460 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36461 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
36464 \begin_layout Description
36465 Biblatex loads the package
36470 \begin_inset Index idx
36475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36478 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36492 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
36494 Biblatex citation style
36498 Biblatex bibliography style
36501 Options to the package
36505 can be entered in the
36512 \begin_layout Description
36514 \begin_inset space ~
36518 \begin_inset space ~
36521 mode) loads the package
36525 with the natbib compatibility mode.
36526 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
36537 behavior very closely.
36542 this option has some additional styles.
36547 styles are also supported by this variant.
36550 \begin_layout Description
36552 \begin_inset space ~
36555 (BibTeX) loads the package
36560 \begin_inset Index idx
36565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36568 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36582 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
36585 \begin_layout Description
36587 \begin_inset space ~
36590 (BibTeX) loads the package
36595 \begin_inset Index idx
36600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36603 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
36606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36617 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
36620 \begin_layout Standard
36629 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
36630 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
36640 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
36642 Whether the output uses numerical,
36643 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
36645 Biblatex citation style
36649 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
36650 a suitable style is proposed.
36657 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
36660 \begin_layout Standard
36661 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
36662 multiple style variants are available in the
36667 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
36668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36683 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
36684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36688 \begin_inset space \space{}
36692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36703 \begin_layout Standard
36704 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
36706 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36710 \begin_inset space \space{}
36714 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
36715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36719 \begin_inset space \space{}
36723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36735 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36747 \begin_inset space ~
36753 Here is a simple example where the text
36754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36758 \begin_inset space ~
36762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36765 appears after the reference:
36768 \begin_layout Quote
36770 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36773 key "latexcompanion"
36781 \begin_layout Standard
36782 All styles except for
36786 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
36787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36795 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
36796 if the style requires this.
36799 \begin_layout Standard
36800 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
36801 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
36802 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
36803 the postnote will follow the last.
36808 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
36809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36812 qualified citation lists
36813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36819 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
36823 dialog will display three columns in the field
36831 \begin_inset space ~
36840 \begin_inset space ~
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36854 If you double-click on an item's
36857 \begin_inset space ~
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36871 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
36874 General text before
36880 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
36883 \begin_layout Subsection
36885 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
36886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36888 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
36892 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
36896 \begin_layout Standard
36898 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
36900 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
36903 \begin_inset space ~
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36911 \begin_inset space ~
36915 \begin_inset space ~
36918 Content\SpecialChar ldots
36921 context menu if specific conditions are met:
36924 \begin_layout Itemize
36926 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
36927 If citation entries include any of the fields
36928 \begin_inset Flex Code
36931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36933 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36942 \begin_inset Flex Code
36945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36947 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36955 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
36957 \begin_inset Flex Code
36960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36962 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36970 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv,
36975 \begin_inset Flex Code
36978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36980 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
36989 the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
36992 \begin_layout Itemize
36994 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
36995 If citation entries include any of the fields
36996 \begin_inset Flex Code
36999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37001 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37010 \change_inserted 5863208 1692129620
37012 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
37014 \begin_inset Flex Code
37017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37019 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
37027 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local drive,
37028 the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
37029 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
37032 \begin_layout Standard
37034 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37035 In addition to that,
37038 \change_inserted 5863208 1676821714
37043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37045 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37046 By default we provide python script
37047 \begin_inset Flex Code
37050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37052 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822064
37061 but you can use any modified script by setting
37062 \begin_inset Flex Code
37065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37067 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822135
37070 citation_search_view
37078 \change_deleted -712698321 1676971997
37080 \change_inserted -712698321 1676971998
37082 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37084 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972080
37089 in your local configuration directory (please refer to the respective section at
37091 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
37095 \change_inserted 5863208 1676822207
37098 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972139
37099 The default setting is to be found in the file
37103 in the same directory and can be copied and modified for this purpose.
37111 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37112 your disk for matching files if you enable
37114 Search drive for cited files
37118 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37119 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
37120 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37121 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
37125 It uses the tokens supplied at
37129 in the same preferences section (by default:
37131 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968851
37136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37138 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37140 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972365
37142 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972365
37144 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37146 \begin_inset Flex Code
37149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37151 \change_inserted 5863208 1676968931
37152 %year% %abbrvciteauthor%
37161 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972344
37163 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972349
37165 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37184 \change_inserted -712698321 1676972338
37187 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37188 are automatically stripped from the result.
37189 \change_deleted -712698321 1676972332
37191 \change_inserted 5863208 1676969379
37200 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37202 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
37203 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
37205 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
37207 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
37208 of the file (at arbitrary position).
37210 opens the first matching file it finds.
37211 This might or might not be the file you are looking for;
37212 the more systematic your file naming is,
37213 and the less ambiguous keywords you use,
37214 the greater the chance this works for you.
37219 \begin_layout Standard
37221 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402434
37222 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
37223 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37225 \begin_inset Flex Code
37228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37230 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
37239 \begin_inset Flex Code
37242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37244 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
37253 but there are also special keys,
37254 which are documented in the
37256 Customization manual
37262 Cite format description
37267 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37269 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402437
37270 Security implications
37273 \begin_layout Standard
37275 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402479
37276 Note that any document (or mainly
37277 \begin_inset Flex Code
37280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37282 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402454
37290 file in this case) coming from a third party might contain malicious links or otherwise malformed URLs and we suggest you do not use this feature for other documents than those you prepared yourself.
37293 \begin_layout Standard
37295 \change_inserted -712698321 1693402467
37296 For that reason the searching on disk is disabled by default and you will be asked for confirmation of viewing all the links (both can be bypassed,
37297 but beware what you are doing).
37302 \begin_layout Section
37304 \begin_inset Index idx
37309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37325 \begin_layout Standard
37326 An index entry is created if you use the menu
37328 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37330 \begin_inset space ~
37335 or the toolbar button
37342 \change_inserted -712698321 1667668430
37344 \begin_inset space ~
37348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37350 reference "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
37355 for some advanced methods)
37359 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37363 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110543
37365 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37369 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37374 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110903
37376 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37378 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110872
37381 the text that appears in the index
37382 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37383 (if you read this in \SpecialChar LyX
37386 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37390 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37393 index inset in the heading above for example)
37396 The word where the cursor is in
37397 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37401 or the currently highlighted text
37402 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37406 is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
37408 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110629
37412 \change_inserted -712698321 1667665903
37414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37418 copied into the inset)
37423 \begin_layout Standard
37425 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110737
37426 (which prints out the index in your document)
37429 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110760
37430 in the document with
37431 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110759
37436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37437 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
37439 \begin_inset space ~
37445 A light blue box labeled
37446 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37457 will show the place where the index
37458 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110783
37460 \change_inserted -712698321 1667110784
37464 \change_deleted -712698321 1667110788
37469 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111027
37472 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111030
37474 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111030
37477 he index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
37479 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111053
37481 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111233
37483 as there are no settings to make.
37484 This changes if you select
37485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37488 Use multiple indexes
37489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37493 \begin_inset space ~
37497 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37499 reference "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
37509 the box turns gray and can be clicked (as there are now settings that can be made).
37510 \change_deleted -712698321 1667111066
37516 \begin_layout Standard
37518 \change_inserted -712698321 1667193296
37520 an index entry is simply a word or phrase in the (alphabetically ordered) index list with a reference to the page or pages where the index entry has been inserted in the document.
37522 you can customize index entries to look different.
37523 You can group index entries hierarchically,
37524 let the index list refer to a range of pages rather than a single page,
37525 let it refer to another entry in the index list rather than,
37526 or additionally to,
37528 you can format the page reference (e.
37529 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37533 make it bold for specific pages),
37534 and you can determine the order of an entry in the list.
37535 These features are available in \SpecialChar LyX
37537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37546 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37549 that appears if the cursor is in an index entry or via the index settings dialog which can be opened via right mouse click on the index inset.
37554 \begin_layout Standard
37556 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112045
37557 give a short overview of
37558 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112047
37562 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112014
37563 these features in turn
37564 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112017
37567 in the next subsections.
37568 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37569 's index mechanism,
37570 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37572 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37574 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
37582 \begin_layout Subsection
37584 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115499
37585 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37587 name "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
37593 Grouping Index Entries
37594 \begin_inset Index idx
37599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37601 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37618 \begin_layout Standard
37619 Index entries are often
37620 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112078
37623 grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index
37624 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112212
37625 and to hold categories together (e.g.,
37631 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37638 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37648 \change_inserted -712698321 1667194528
37649 This can be done in \SpecialChar LyX
37652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37653 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
37663 Both methods insert a subinset in which you can enter the subentry.
37664 Maximally two such subentry insets,
37666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37670 three levels of grouping in total,
37671 are allowed per index entry.
37672 Note that it does not matter where you insert these subentry insets in the index inset,
37673 but the order of them matters and determines the grouping hierarchy.
37674 In the \SpecialChar LyX
37676 the index entry in the header above shows an example for a two-level grouped entry (and you can see the result in the index of this document at the entry
37681 \SpecialChar menuseparator
37690 \begin_layout Standard
37692 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195700
37694 each subentry is on a new line and indented a bit more.
37695 Note that the higher levels only get their own page references if they have also a separate entry (without subentry)
37696 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37697 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
37698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37706 First we create the entry
37707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37715 \begin_inset space ~
37719 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37721 reference "subsec:Lists"
37727 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
37728 \begin_inset space ~
37732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37734 reference "sec:Itemize"
37740 we insert the command
37743 \begin_layout Standard
37745 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37751 \begin_layout Standard
37753 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37757 \begin_layout Standard
37759 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37765 \begin_layout Standard
37767 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112419
37768 for the enumerated list in section
37769 \begin_inset space ~
37773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37775 reference "sec:Enumerate"
37785 \begin_layout Standard
37787 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195765
37788 Note also that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37790 subentries are indicated by a preceding
37791 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112752
37795 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112757
37799 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37807 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112802
37809 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
37811 although you have to take care that the character is not
37814 \change_inserted -712698321 1667122587
37817 a real exclamation mark has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
37819 \begin_inset space ~
37823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37825 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
37831 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112764
37832 marks the grouping levels.
37836 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112659
37837 You can have three levels;
37838 every index level is indented a bit more.
37839 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
37840 If we don't have an index entry for
37841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37849 it will be printed anyway,
37850 but without a page number.
37855 \begin_layout Subsection
37857 \begin_inset Index idx
37862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37864 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
37867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37881 \begin_layout Standard
37883 \change_inserted -712698321 1667112869
37885 \change_deleted -712698321 1667112870
37889 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113289
37890 refers to single pages where the index entries have been inserted
37891 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113293
37892 will appear with the page number of the indexed section
37896 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113300
37898 \change_inserted -712698321 1667113300
37902 \change_deleted -712698321 1667113313
37903 index more pages under the same entry
37904 \change_inserted -712698321 1667114974
37905 refer to a page range instead,
37906 you can do this by inserting two index entries:
37907 one that marks the beginning of the range,
37908 the other that marks its end
37912 \change_inserted -712698321 1667195873
37913 Both need to contain the same index entry (and possibly subentries) text.
37914 To mark start and end,
37915 select the respective
37919 option in the index inset settings dialog.
37920 Range starts and ends are indicated in the index inset label via
37921 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37939 \begin_layout Standard
37941 \change_inserted -712698321 1667126475
37942 Note that you have to take care that range markers are complete.
37943 If a range start without a respective end (or vice versa) is found,
37944 the index processor might terminate and not produce an index without informing you about the reason.
37947 \begin_layout Standard
37949 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37951 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
37952 we create an index entry in section
37953 \begin_inset space ~
37957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37959 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
37967 \begin_layout Standard
37969 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37972 Paragraph environments|(
37975 \begin_layout Standard
37977 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37978 and another entry at the end of section
37979 \begin_inset space ~
37983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37985 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
37993 \begin_layout Standard
37995 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
37998 Paragraph environments|)
38001 \begin_layout Standard
38003 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115220
38005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38028 respectively start and end the index range.
38029 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
38030 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
38031 An example is the index entry
38032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38045 \begin_layout Subsection
38047 \begin_inset Index idx
38052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38054 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38071 \begin_layout Standard
38072 It is also possible to refer to another index entry
38073 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115277
38080 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116351
38081 This might be useful if you anticipate that your readers might look for an entry at different places,
38083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38095 (which could be resolved by a cross reference
38096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38108 ) or also if you use hierarchical grouping (section
38109 \begin_inset space ~
38113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38115 reference "subsec:Grouping-Index-Entries"
38122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38137 \begin_layout Standard
38139 \change_inserted -712698321 1667115626
38140 This is possible in \SpecialChar LyX
38143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38144 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38150 \begin_layout Standard
38152 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116218
38153 If you want a cross-reference and page references,
38156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38157 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38169 instead and makes more sense if you also add entries that are referred to by page number as in
38170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38190 \begin_layout Standard
38192 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38193 We referred for example in the index entry
38194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38202 \begin_inset space ~
38206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38208 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
38213 ) to the index entry
38214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38221 in the same section using the entry
38224 \begin_layout Standard
38226 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38229 GIF|see{Image formats}
38232 \begin_layout Standard
38234 \change_deleted -712698321 1667115542
38235 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
38237 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
38238 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
38243 \begin_layout Subsection
38245 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121174
38246 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38248 name "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
38255 \begin_inset Index idx
38260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38262 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38279 \begin_layout Standard
38281 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116657
38282 Sometimes the automatic ordering of index entries is not the one you want.
38283 This might be the case with some index processors (such as
38288 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116658
38291 f you use accented characters in the index entry
38292 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116670
38293 the entries might not follow the rules for the index order
38294 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116709
38295 or if you use macros
38298 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127198
38302 \begin_layout Standard
38304 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116836
38305 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
38310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38311 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
38313 \begin_inset space ~
38317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38319 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38329 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
38330 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
38331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38357 \begin_inset Index idx
38362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38364 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38379 \begin_inset Index idx
38384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38386 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38401 \begin_inset Index idx
38406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38413 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
38415 maison but we want the order maïs,
38422 \begin_layout Standard
38424 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38427 previous entry@current entry
38430 \begin_layout Standard
38432 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38433 In our case we want to have
38434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38449 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
38452 \begin_layout Standard
38454 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38460 \begin_layout Standard
38462 \change_deleted -712698321 1667116827
38463 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
38464 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
38466 See the next subsection for an example.
38467 \change_inserted -712698321 1667116836
38471 \begin_layout Standard
38473 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127344
38474 To accommodate for that,
38477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38478 Index Properties\SpecialChar menuseparator
38482 The sortkey you enter here is not output in the index,
38483 it is just used for sorting (instead of the actual entry).
38485 you can pass the sort key
38486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38497 should your index processor be incapable to sort Slovenian postmodern philosophers correctly.
38500 \begin_layout Standard
38502 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127399
38503 Note that in \SpecialChar LaTeX
38505 sortkeys are separated from the actual entry by the character
38506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38514 This also works in \SpecialChar LyX
38516 although you have to take care that the character is not formatted.
38518 a real @ character has to be inserted to an index entry in a specific way.
38520 \begin_inset space ~
38524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38526 reference "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
38536 \begin_layout Subsection
38538 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127427
38540 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127428
38544 \begin_inset Index idx
38549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38551 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38568 \begin_layout Standard
38570 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127459
38572 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127459
38575 he appearance of index entries
38576 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127470
38577 can be formatted as usual
38579 via the text style dialog
38580 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127566
38582 the toolbar or shortcuts.
38583 Entries will appear in the index list in the way they are formatted in the index entry
38586 \begin_inset Index idx
38591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38593 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
38596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38599 This is an italic dummy entry
38610 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127631
38611 Note that this also means that two differently formatted otherwise identical entries,
38613 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38626 will be listed separately.
38628 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38630 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127638
38634 \begin_layout Standard
38636 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38640 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38642 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38646 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127611
38652 option in the index entry settings dialog.
38654 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127514
38655 number using the character
38656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38663 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
38664 -command without a backslash.
38665 We can write for example
38666 \change_inserted -712698321 1667196148
38667 You can either select one of the proposed formatting options (
38687 you are supposed to enter a valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
38694 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38698 a self-defined command
38699 \begin_inset Flex Code
38702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38704 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118710
38712 or an existing macro such as
38713 \begin_inset Flex Code
38716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38718 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127771
38731 \begin_layout Standard
38733 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38736 italic page number:|textit
38739 \begin_layout Standard
38741 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118734
38742 to get the page number in italic.
38743 \begin_inset Index idx
38748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 italic page number:|textit
38755 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
38756 -commands begin with a backslash,
38757 but in this special case
38758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38774 \begin_inset space ~
38780 Have a look at section
38781 \begin_inset space ~
38785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38787 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
38792 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38798 \begin_layout Standard
38800 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118832
38801 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38810 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
38814 to generate the index,
38816 \begin_inset space ~
38820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38822 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
38833 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
38838 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
38840 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
38843 key "latexcompanion"
38858 \begin_layout Standard
38860 we encourage you to
38861 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118871
38862 not format page numbers directly as shown above
38863 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118875
38864 use self-defined commands
38868 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127835
38869 This makes it easier to change the formatting,
38870 should you or your publisher decide to do that later.
38872 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118961
38874 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
38875 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to
38876 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118968
38879 \change_deleted -712698321 1667118970
38883 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119029
38884 formatting macro for index entries that refer to the page(s) where the indexed term is defined
38885 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119044
38886 definition of the indexed term,
38887 so that users can easily find definitions.
38889 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119044
38893 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119047
38896 the following in the preamble
38899 \begin_layout Standard
38905 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119052
38907 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127880
38913 \change_deleted -712698321 1667127881
38921 \begin_layout Standard
38923 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119063
38925 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38926 add the custom formatting
38927 \begin_inset Flex Code
38930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38932 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127914
38940 to the respective entry settings dialog.
38945 \begin_layout Standard
38947 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38953 \begin_layout Standard
38955 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119123
38956 in the index entry.
38957 \begin_inset Index idx
38962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38969 The advantage is that,
38971 \change_inserted -712698321 1667127963
38972 This will cause all page references that use this custom format to be printed in italics.
38975 f you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
38976 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
38977 not every single index entry.
38978 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38982 \begin_layout Standard
38984 \change_inserted -712698321 1667118842
38985 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38990 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119415
38996 If you use the index processor
39002 makeindex or xindex
39005 \begin_inset space ~
39009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39011 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
39017 such custom macros do not work out of the box.
39022 requires you to define semantic elements in the xindy
39023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39030 (style file) you use before they can be used.
39032 this would require to add the following line in the module file:
39035 \begin_layout Verbatim
39037 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119381
39039 (markup-locref :open "
39041 IndexDef{" :close "}" :attr "IndexDef")
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39046 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119392
39048 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39051 key "latexcompanion"
39066 \begin_layout Standard
39067 You can also change the layout
39068 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128294
39070 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128294
39076 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128049
39078 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128050
39082 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128052
39086 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128093
39090 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128098
39093 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128100
39096 get a bold font for all index entries.
39098 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128129
39101 it is better (and required for
39102 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128131
39105 more advanced tasks
39106 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128135
39110 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128139
39113 to set up a so-called
39116 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128153
39140 ) to determine the formatting;
39141 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119655
39146 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119672
39148 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119674
39154 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119661
39161 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119662
39169 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119665
39177 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119667
39182 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119778
39184 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39186 key "makeindex,xindex,xindy"
39192 \change_deleted -712698321 1667119778
39194 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39196 key "makeindex,xindy"
39205 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128459
39206 There are also some \SpecialChar LaTeX
39207 packages available that ease such formatting,
39209 \begin_inset Flex URL
39212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39214 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128460
39216 https://ctan.org/topic/index
39226 \begin_layout Subsection
39228 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119819
39229 Special Characters in Index Entries
39230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39232 name "subsec:Index-Special-Characters"
39239 \begin_layout Standard
39241 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128522
39242 As already mentioned above,
39243 some characters have a special meaning in index entries,
39246 \begin_inset Flex Code
39249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39251 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120139
39261 \begin_inset Flex Code
39264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39266 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120150
39276 \begin_inset Flex Code
39279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39281 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120158
39282 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39294 \begin_inset Flex Code
39297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39299 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120173
39308 If you use them literally,
39309 you might get surprising results or even a non-working index.
39311 you will not get the character itself.
39314 \begin_layout Standard
39316 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120574
39317 In order to use these characters in inset entries,
39319 \begin_inset Quotes els
39323 \begin_inset Quotes ers
39327 that is prepended by a character that tells the index processor to treat this character without its special meaning.
39329 the escape character is
39330 \begin_inset Flex Code
39333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39335 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120286
39336 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39346 (but this can be changed).
39348 \begin_inset Flex Code
39351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39353 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120326
39354 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39366 \begin_inset Flex Code
39369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39371 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120329
39372 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39384 \begin_inset Flex Code
39387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39389 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120332
39390 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39394 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
39406 \begin_inset Flex Code
39409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39411 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120335
39412 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39422 to get the special character you want.
39423 Note that the escape character,
39425 \begin_inset Flex Code
39428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39430 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120426
39431 \begin_inset Quotes qld
39446 be inserted in a TeX code box (see section
39447 \begin_inset space ~
39451 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39453 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39463 \begin_layout Subsection
39465 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39468 name "subsec:Convenience-Functions-Index"
39472 Convenience Functions for Index Handling
39475 \begin_layout Standard
39477 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669552
39478 Indexing a document can be a tedious task,
39479 since you often have to insert the same index entry multiple times in order to refer to passages at different pages.
39480 This is not only time-consuming,
39481 but also error-prone;
39483 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39487 you have to remember how exactly an inset entry has been inserted to avoid redundant entries.
39489 provides some functions to ease the task.
39492 \begin_layout Standard
39494 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669398
39496 if you want to add an entry which you already used before,
39497 you can open the outliner via
39499 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39503 \begin_inset space ~
39507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39509 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
39519 section (it is convenient to have this open while indexing anyway),
39520 scroll to the entry in question (if you check
39525 it will be more easier),
39530 -click on the entry and select
39532 Insert Copy at Cursor Position
39534 from the context menu.
39535 This will do just what it says:
39536 it will insert a copy of that index inset at the position where the cursor is.
39539 \begin_layout Standard
39541 \change_inserted -712698321 1667669772
39544 also provides a semi-automated solution to index a word.
39545 If you right-click on an index entry inset,
39546 you can select from the context menu
39548 Index All Occurrences of this Word
39551 This will search the whole document (only single documents,
39552 not master and child documents) and insert a copy of this index inset after each occurrence of the word that precedes the inset.
39553 Note that casing of the word does not matter,
39554 but only full words in the same grammatical form are considered (so if
39558 is the word before the index entry,
39563 will be considered as well,
39569 Please take care to not overuse this function and to carefully check the result afterwards.
39571 a good index does not simply list all occurrences of a given word in a specific document (that is a concordance rather),
39572 but only relevant occurrences!
39573 So as convenient as this function might seem,
39574 it is suitable especially for particular cases.
39576 you will have more work with removing again falsely inserted entries than you would have with manually inserting them at the right place.
39579 \begin_layout Subsection
39581 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120869
39583 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120870
39587 \begin_inset Index idx
39592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39611 name "subsec:Index-Program"
39618 \begin_layout Standard
39620 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120909
39622 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120910
39629 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120657
39638 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120769
39646 for index generation;
39647 otherwise the program
39652 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
39655 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120846
39660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39662 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120841
39668 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39669 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39670 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
39671 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
39673 if you are writing in another than the English language,
39688 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120851
39689 As a further option,
39690 you can select the rather new
39697 \begin_layout Itemize
39699 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121183
39705 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
39706 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
39707 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly (we have shown above,
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39715 reference "subsec:Index-Entry-Order"
39721 how to manually fix this sorting,
39722 but this is very tedious work).
39725 \begin_layout Itemize
39727 \change_inserted -712698321 1667121483
39728 The alternative program,
39734 is a newer and much more mighty alternative.
39735 It can sort most languages correctly,
39736 and it is also much more customizable in the output.
39742 is no longer actively maintained,
39743 and it has bugs that are most likely not being addressed anytime soon.
39749 is not always available out of the box and quite a challenge to install on some systems (particularly Windows).
39750 But if you have it available,
39751 it is almost always a better option than
39758 \begin_layout Itemize
39760 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128720
39767 is a quite new and actively developed index processor.
39768 It is included in modern \SpecialChar TeX
39769 distributions such as \SpecialChar TeX
39770 Live and Mik\SpecialChar TeX
39772 is pretty much customizable and supports many languages.
39773 The program is still in development,
39774 so not everything might work equally well than in the older processors.
39775 But the program is definitely worth a try,
39780 does not work or not satisfy your needs.
39785 \begin_layout Standard
39787 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120703
39789 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120703
39793 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128738
39795 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128739
39798 can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
39799 's preferences dialog,
39801 \begin_inset space ~
39805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39807 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
39813 The available options are listed and explained in
39814 \change_inserted -712698321 1667128757
39816 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39818 key "makeindex-man,xindex,xindy"
39824 \change_deleted -712698321 1667128757
39826 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39828 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
39838 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120810
39840 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120810
39844 \change_deleted -712698321 1667120813
39846 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39849 alternative program
39850 \change_inserted -712698321 1667120828
39853 to generate the index.
39856 \begin_layout Standard
39857 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
39858 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
39861 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39862 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39866 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
39869 \begin_layout Subsection
39871 \change_inserted -712698321 1667111129
39872 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39874 name "subsec:Multiple-Indexes"
39883 \begin_layout Standard
39884 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
39886 you might need to set up a separate
39887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39894 next to the standard index.
39896 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
39897 but there are packages that add this feature.
39904 \begin_inset Index idx
39909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39912 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
39915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39926 package to generate multiple indexes.
39927 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
39932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39933 If yours does not ship it,
39934 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
39937 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
39945 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
39947 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
39948 Please consult the package's manual for details.
39956 \begin_layout Standard
39957 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
39958 for the use of multiple indexes,
39961 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39962 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39965 and select the option
39967 Use multiple Indexes
39974 already contains the standard index
39975 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39979 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39983 To add further indexes,
39984 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
39988 input field and press the
39993 The new index now also appears in the list.
39995 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
39996 label color to the new index.
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40000 Once the document changes have been applied,
40001 you can find the new index list in
40003 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40004 List/Contents/References
40010 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
40011 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
40012 but there are additional features:
40015 \begin_layout Itemize
40016 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
40017 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
40020 \begin_layout Itemize
40021 By right-clicking on an index,
40022 you can change its type.
40024 you can specify an index to be a
40030 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
40032 if you use a book class,
40033 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
40034 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
40037 \begin_layout Itemize
40042 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
40043 code in the name of the index.
40046 \begin_layout Section
40047 Nomenclature/Glossary
40048 \begin_inset Index idx
40053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 \begin_inset Index idx
40065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40067 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
40070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40084 name "sec:Nomenclature"
40091 \begin_layout Standard
40092 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
40095 \begin_layout Standard
40096 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
40097 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40103 \begin_inset Index idx
40108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40111 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40126 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40129 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40136 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40140 \begin_layout Standard
40141 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
40143 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40149 \begin_inset space ~
40154 or the toolbar button
40157 arg "nomencl-insert"
40162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40173 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
40176 \begin_layout Standard
40177 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
40178 The first is the term or
40182 that you wish to define.
40187 of the term or symbol.
40190 \begin_layout Standard
40191 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40200 To use \SpecialChar TeX
40201 code for nomenclature entries the option
40205 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
40213 \begin_layout Subsection
40214 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
40215 \begin_inset Index idx
40220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40222 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40239 \begin_layout Standard
40240 If you have symbols in formulas,
40241 you have to define them in the
40245 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40252 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40261 \begin_inset Newline newline
40269 \begin_inset Newline newline
40275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40282 character starts/ends the formula.
40283 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
40284 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
40285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40295 For capital Greek letters,
40296 start the command also with a capital letter,
40306 \begin_layout Standard
40307 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40308 syntax is given in section
40309 \begin_inset space ~
40313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40315 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
40323 \begin_layout Standard
40327 \begin_inset space ~
40332 dialog to format the description text;
40333 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
40335 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
40336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40340 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40347 in this document is:
40348 \begin_inset Newline newline
40353 dummy entry for the character
40358 \begin_inset Newline newline
40370 \begin_inset space ~
40380 font use the command
40411 \begin_layout Standard
40412 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
40413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40417 \begin_inset space \space{}
40421 \begin_inset Newline newline
40437 \begin_inset Newline newline
40440 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
40441 This command will make the font of all symbols
40448 \begin_inset space ~
40456 \begin_layout Standard
40457 If the characters |
40458 \begin_inset space \space{}
40462 \begin_inset space \space{}
40466 \begin_inset space \space{}
40471 \begin_inset space \space{}
40475 \begin_inset space \space{}
40478 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
40479 code they need to be escaped by adding a
40480 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
40482 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
40485 character in front of them.
40486 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
40488 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40489 LatexCommand nomenclature
40490 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
40491 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
40497 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
40499 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40500 LatexCommand nomenclature
40501 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
40502 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
40512 \begin_layout Subsection
40513 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
40514 \begin_inset Index idx
40519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40521 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40538 \begin_layout Standard
40539 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40540 -code of the symbol definition.
40541 This leads to undesired results when you,
40543 have symbols in formulas.
40544 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
40547 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40548 LatexCommand nomenclature
40550 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
40558 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40562 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
40563 LatexCommand nomenclature
40566 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
40572 They will be sorted by
40573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40599 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40602 will be sorted before the
40606 since the character
40607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40614 is considered in sorting.
40617 \begin_layout Standard
40618 To control the sort order,
40622 \begin_inset space ~
40627 field of the nomenclature dialog.
40628 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
40629 For the example given,
40634 in this field for the
40635 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40643 will be located before
40644 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
40650 \begin_layout Standard
40651 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
40657 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40667 \begin_layout Subsection
40668 Nomenclature Options
40669 \begin_inset Index idx
40674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40676 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
40679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40691 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40693 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
40700 \begin_layout Standard
40705 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
40706 Here are some of its options;
40707 for more have a look at its documentation:
40710 \begin_layout Description
40711 refeq Appends the phrase
40712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40725 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40728 to every nomenclature entry,
40735 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
40738 \begin_layout Description
40739 refpage Appends the phrase
40740 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40756 to every nomenclature entry,
40763 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
40766 \begin_layout Description
40767 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
40770 \begin_layout Standard
40771 To use one or more of the options,
40772 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
40774 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40778 In this document the options
40786 \begin_layout Standard
40787 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
40793 \begin_layout Standard
40794 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
40798 field in the nomenclature dialog:
40801 \begin_layout Description
40811 \begin_layout Description
40814 nomrefpage Like the
40821 \begin_layout Description
40824 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
40833 \begin_layout Description
40837 \begin_inset space ~
40843 \begin_inset space ~
40848 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
40851 \begin_layout Standard
40853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40860 are automatically translated for most document languages.
40862 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
40866 \begin_layout Standard
40875 \begin_inset Newline newline
40881 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40885 \begin_inset space ~
40901 \begin_inset Newline newline
40908 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40909 \begin_inset Newline newline
40915 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40919 \begin_inset space ~
40937 \begin_layout Standard
40938 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
40939 assure that you use
40942 \begin_inset space ~
40947 in the document settings under
40950 \begin_inset space ~
40958 \begin_layout Standard
40966 \begin_inset Newline newline
40970 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
40973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40974 \begin_inset space ~
40987 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
40989 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
40990 \begin_inset Newline newline
40997 pagedeclaration}[1]{
40998 \begin_inset Newline newline
41002 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
41005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41006 \begin_inset space ~
41019 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
41024 \begin_layout Subsection
41025 Printing the Nomenclature
41026 \begin_inset Index idx
41031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41033 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41050 \begin_layout Standard
41051 To print the nomenclature,
41054 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41055 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
41060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41071 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
41072 By right-clicking on it,
41073 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
41074 You can choose between these settings:
41077 \begin_layout Description
41078 Default a space of 1
41079 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41085 \begin_layout Description
41087 \begin_inset space ~
41091 \begin_inset space ~
41094 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
41097 \begin_layout Description
41098 Custom custom space
41101 \begin_layout Standard
41102 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
41103 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41111 If you are not happy with the name,
41112 you can change it by redefining the command
41120 in order to change the name to
41125 add the following line to the preamble:
41128 \begin_layout Standard
41141 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
41144 \begin_layout Standard
41145 When you are using another document language than English,
41147 \begin_inset Newline newline
41163 where *** is the name of the language used.
41166 \begin_layout Subsection
41167 Nomenclature Program
41168 \begin_inset Index idx
41173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41175 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41190 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41192 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
41199 \begin_layout Standard
41206 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
41208 to generate the nomenclature.
41210 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
41216 \begin_inset space ~
41220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41222 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
41228 The available options are listed and explained in
41229 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
41231 key "nomencl,makeindex"
41239 \begin_layout Section
41241 \begin_inset Index idx
41246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41253 \begin_inset Index idx
41258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41260 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41277 name "sec:Branches"
41284 \begin_layout Standard
41285 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
41286 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
41287 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
41290 \begin_layout Standard
41291 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
41292 allows you to put text into branches.
41293 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
41294 To create a branch,
41295 either select the menu
41297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41298 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
41301 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
41303 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41311 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
41312 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
41313 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
41314 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
41316 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
41317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41329 \begin_inset space ~
41332 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
41333 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
41336 \begin_layout Standard
41337 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
41338 These boxes are inserted via the menu
41340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41343 where you can choose a branch.
41344 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
41347 \begin_layout Standard
41348 Here is an example,
41349 where only the question text appears,
41350 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
41353 \begin_layout Standard
41354 \begin_inset Branch Question
41358 \begin_layout Standard
41364 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
41372 \begin_layout Standard
41373 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41377 \begin_layout Standard
41383 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
41391 \begin_layout Standard
41398 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41399 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41403 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
41404 Consider for example a file
41405 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41412 which has the above branches.
41414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41422 the PDF export file would be called
41423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41446 branch were inactive,
41448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41485 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
41486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41489 if both branches were active.
41490 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
41491 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41497 \begin_layout Standard
41499 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
41500 It is also possible to
41501 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
41505 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
41507 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
41511 whose content is output just in case the branch is
41516 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
41517 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
41521 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
41523 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
41526 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
41527 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
41528 right-click on the inset button and choose
41531 \begin_inset space ~
41539 \begin_layout Standard
41540 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41544 \begin_layout Standard
41551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41558 branch is deactivated.
41564 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41570 \begin_layout Standard
41571 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
41572 like inside equations,
41573 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
41574 definitions for each branch.
41575 For example you can define for the question branch
41579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41580 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41583 \begin_inset space ~
41587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41589 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
41602 \begin_layout Standard
41612 \begin_layout Standard
41622 \begin_layout Standard
41623 and for the answer branch
41626 \begin_layout Standard
41636 \begin_layout Standard
41646 \begin_layout Standard
41647 \begin_inset Branch Question
41651 \begin_layout Standard
41655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41683 \begin_layout Standard
41684 \begin_inset Branch Answer
41688 \begin_layout Standard
41692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41720 \begin_layout Standard
41721 Now it is possible to use the
41725 question{\SpecialChar ldots
41732 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
41735 commands to obtain conditional output.
41736 Here is an example formula where only the
41743 \begin_inset Formula
41745 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
41753 \begin_layout Standard
41755 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
41763 \begin_layout Standard
41764 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
41765 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41769 \begin_inset space \space{}
41772 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
41774 For this advanced usage,
41782 Flex insets and InsetLayout
41785 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
41789 \begin_layout Standard
41791 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41793 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813809
41795 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813809
41797 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41799 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813823
41801 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813823
41803 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41805 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813812
41807 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41809 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813845
41810 to keep all branches of a given name in
41811 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41813 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813847
41815 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41817 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813855
41819 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813873
41820 activation branch status with
41821 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41823 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813886
41826 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813893
41827 of all branch insets in the document we provide
41828 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813893
41831 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41835 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813903
41840 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813949
41841 that sets the open/close state to all branches of the same name from the branch currently at cursor.
41842 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813904
41845 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41847 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813911
41849 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813959
41851 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41853 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813962
41855 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41856 keyboard shortcut or add
41857 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813966
41859 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813966
41861 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41863 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813971
41865 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41866 user-defined context menu
41867 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813975
41869 \change_deleted -712698321 1686813976
41871 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41873 \change_inserted -712698321 1686813978
41875 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
41881 \begin_layout Section
41883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41885 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
41890 \begin_inset Index idx
41895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41904 \begin_layout Standard
41906 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
41911 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41912 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41916 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
41919 allows you to set up
41920 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
41922 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
41926 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
41928 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
41932 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
41936 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
41941 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
41943 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
41947 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
41949 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
41952 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41954 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
41956 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
41964 \begin_inset Index idx
41969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41972 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
41975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41987 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
41988 which you need to enable by clicking
41990 Use Hyperref Support
41992 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by your document class or another package,
41993 the checkbox you need to click is labeled
41995 Customize Hyperref Options
41998 Among other things,
42000 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
42004 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
42006 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
42010 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
42014 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
42017 cross-references in the
42018 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
42022 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
42024 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
42028 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
42029 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
42033 table of contents entry or on a reference to
42034 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
42035 open a website or to
42037 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
42039 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
42041 you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
42042 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
42047 \begin_layout Standard
42048 The header information in the dialog tab
42052 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
42053 Many programs are able to extract this information,
42056 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
42059 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
42060 This is very useful to sort,
42061 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
42065 \begin_inset space ~
42069 \begin_inset space ~
42076 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
42079 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
42082 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
42086 \begin_inset space ~
42090 \begin_inset space ~
42094 \begin_inset space ~
42099 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
42100 which is useful for presentations.
42103 \begin_layout Standard
42105 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
42107 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
42115 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
42116 you can customize the
42117 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
42119 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
42123 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
42125 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
42129 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
42131 and you can specify
42134 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
42136 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
42137 will look and if links for
42139 bibliographical backreferences are created
42140 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
42146 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either sections,
42147 pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42157 \begin_inset space ~
42161 \begin_inset space ~
42166 option allows long links to be split;
42170 \begin_inset space ~
42174 \begin_inset space ~
42178 \begin_inset space ~
42186 \begin_inset space ~
42191 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
42195 \begin_inset space ~
42200 colors the different links.
42201 The default colors are:
42204 \begin_layout Labeling
42205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42210 for hyperlinks and URLs
42213 \begin_layout Labeling
42214 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42222 \begin_layout Labeling
42223 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
42231 \begin_layout Standard
42232 but you can change these in the
42233 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
42235 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
42241 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
42243 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
42250 in this document they were changed with the
42251 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
42255 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
42265 \begin_layout Quote
42274 \begin_layout Standard
42276 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
42282 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
42284 depending on the option selected,
42285 the number of the section,
42286 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
42291 \begin_layout Standard
42296 you can specify if PDF
42297 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
42299 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
42303 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
42304 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
42306 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
42307 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
42309 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
42311 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
42315 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
42321 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
42323 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
42325 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
42328 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening the PDF.
42336 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
42337 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
42338 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
42339 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42346 2 will display all sections and subsections,
42348 \begin_inset space ~
42351 1 will only display the sections
42352 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
42353 (collapsing the rest)
42356 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
42360 \begin_layout Standard
42362 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
42367 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref manual
42368 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42375 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
42376 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
42377 \begin_inset Flex Code
42380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42382 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
42393 not via the package options.
42394 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
42395 If you need to use one of those options,
42396 you can set them by adding
42399 \begin_layout Quote
42401 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
42404 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option
42405 \change_deleted 274215730 1652836969
42407 \change_inserted 274215730 1652836970
42413 \begin_layout Standard
42415 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
42418 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42419 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42422 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
42427 \begin_layout Standard
42429 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
42434 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
42436 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
42437 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions,
42438 input is simply ignored).
42439 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
42445 At the point of writing this,
42446 the list of options is still rather small and not very well documented (look for a file called
42448 documentmetadata-support.pdf
42451 but it is expected that in the future,
42452 rather fundamental PDF properties (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
42455 \begin_layout Standard
42457 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
42458 PDF properties are also used in this document.
42459 When you look in its document settings,
42460 you can see that some additional
42465 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
42466 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42478 \begin_layout Section
42480 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42484 name "sec:TeX-Code"
42491 \begin_layout Subsection
42494 \begin_inset Index idx
42499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42507 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42509 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
42516 \begin_layout Standard
42517 As \SpecialChar LyX
42518 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
42520 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
42521 commands and constructs,
42524 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
42525 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
42526 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42527 -package for every problem,
42528 though \SpecialChar LyX
42529 cannot support all packages and their commands.
42532 \begin_layout Standard
42534 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
42535 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
42536 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
42539 Code box is created by the menu
42541 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42543 \begin_inset space ~
42548 or by the toolbar button
42561 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
42568 \begin_layout Standard
42569 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
42571 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
42574 if you want to draw a frame around a word
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42579 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
42584 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42592 you can write the command part
42598 in a \SpecialChar TeX
42599 Code box before the word and the closing brace
42603 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
42604 Code box behind the word.
42605 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
42606 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
42609 \begin_layout Standard
42610 \begin_inset Graphics
42611 filename clipart/ERT.png
42619 \begin_layout Standard
42623 \begin_layout Standard
42624 This is a line with a
42628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 \begin_layout Standard
42652 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42661 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
42662 -commands without parameters,
42663 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
42664 know that the command is finished.
42672 \begin_layout Subsection
42673 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42675 \begin_inset Argument 1
42678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42679 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
42686 \begin_inset Index idx
42691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42701 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42709 When you write larger documents or books,
42710 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42711 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
42712 uses in the background.
42713 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
42714 is based on commands,
42716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42724 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
42726 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
42727 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
42728 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
42729 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
42732 \begin_layout Standard
42733 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
42735 As mentioned above,
42736 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42738 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42741 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42751 \begin_layout Standard
42752 As result you find that the package
42757 \begin_inset Index idx
42762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42765 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
42768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42781 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
42783 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42786 \SpecialChar menuseparator
42790 \begin_inset space ~
42798 \begin_layout Standard
42803 usepackage[options]{package name}
42806 \begin_layout Standard
42807 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
42808 commands begin with a backslash,
42809 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
42810 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
42813 \begin_layout Standard
42814 In your case the package name is
42819 After a look in the documentation of the package,
42820 you know that the option
42824 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
42825 So you add the command
42828 \begin_layout Standard
42833 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
42836 \begin_layout Standard
42837 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
42841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42842 For more commands provided by the
42847 have a look at its documentation,
42849 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42864 \begin_layout Standard
42865 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
42866 For example if you use a
42871 you don't need the package
42876 you can instead write
42879 \begin_layout Standard
42884 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
42889 \begin_layout Standard
42890 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
42891 So if you plan to write a large document,
42892 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
42899 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
42902 \begin_layout Standard
42903 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
42904 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
42905 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
42907 use the \SpecialChar TeX
42908 Code box as described in the previous section.
42911 \begin_layout Standard
42912 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
42914 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42916 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
42918 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
42926 \begin_layout Standard
42927 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
42933 \begin_layout Standard
42937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42947 \begin_inset Note Note
42950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42951 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
42959 \begin_layout Left Header
42960 \begin_inset Argument 1
42963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42983 \begin_inset Note Note
42986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42987 defines the header line as described below
42995 \begin_layout Center Header
42996 \begin_inset Argument 1
42999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43008 \begin_layout Right Header
43009 \begin_inset Argument 1
43012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43033 \begin_layout Left Footer
43034 \begin_inset Argument 1
43037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43058 \begin_layout Center Footer
43059 \begin_inset Argument 1
43062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43074 \begin_inset Newline newline
43078 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43084 \begin_layout Right Footer
43085 \begin_inset Argument 1
43088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43110 \begin_layout Section
43111 Customized Page Headers and Footers
43112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43114 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
43119 \begin_inset Index idx
43124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43126 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43141 \begin_inset Index idx
43146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43155 \begin_layout Standard
43156 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
43157 you need to set the
43160 \begin_inset space ~
43171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43177 \begin_inset space ~
43183 As a second step add in the menu
43185 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43186 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43195 Custom Header/Footerlines
43198 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43202 This module offers the following 6
43203 \begin_inset space ~
43209 \begin_layout Description
43211 \begin_inset space ~
43215 \begin_inset space ~
43219 \begin_inset space ~
43223 \begin_inset space ~
43227 \begin_inset space ~
43233 \begin_layout Description
43235 \begin_inset space ~
43239 \begin_inset space ~
43243 \begin_inset space ~
43247 \begin_inset space ~
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43257 \begin_layout Standard
43258 for the different positions in the header/footer.
43259 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
43262 \begin_layout Standard
43264 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
43265 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
43267 \begin_inset space ~
43271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43273 reference "fig:Page-layout"
43278 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
43281 \begin_layout Standard
43282 \begin_inset Float figure
43289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43292 \begin_inset Tabular
43293 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
43294 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
43295 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43296 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43297 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
43299 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
43311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43317 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43328 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43346 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43357 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
43360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 The normal text on the page goes here.
43362 The running header is above the text,
43363 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
43364 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
43365 title of the chapter,
43366 company logo but you can use almost anything,
43372 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43381 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43392 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
43404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43410 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43421 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
43424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
43433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43439 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
43442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43457 \begin_inset Caption Standard
43459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43460 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43462 name "fig:Page-layout"
43466 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
43479 \begin_layout Standard
43480 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43489 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
43492 \begin_inset space ~
43497 is set to “Default”.
43498 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
43506 \begin_layout Subsection
43510 \begin_layout Standard
43511 To define your header line,
43512 add all three header environments.
43513 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
43514 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
43515 For single-sided documents,
43516 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
43517 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
43518 nothing appears in the output.
43519 Defining the footer line works similarly.
43522 \begin_layout Standard
43523 For the definition,
43524 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
43525 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
43528 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
43530 \begin_inset space ~
43538 \begin_layout Description
43541 thepage prints the current page number
43544 \begin_layout Description
43547 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
43550 \begin_layout Description
43553 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
43556 \begin_layout Description
43559 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
43560 If the document has chapters,
43561 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
43563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43567 \begin_inset Quotes prd
43570 because it usually goes in a left header.
43573 \begin_layout Description
43576 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
43577 If the document has chapters,
43578 it prints the current section number and title instead.
43579 It is normally used in the right header.
43582 \begin_layout Subsection
43583 Default header/footer
43586 \begin_layout Standard
43587 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
43588 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
43589 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
43590 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
43591 but leave it blank.
43593 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
43597 \begin_inset space ~
43605 \begin_layout Subsection
43609 \begin_layout Standard
43610 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
43611 Some pages are different.
43612 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
43613 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
43614 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
43615 but that is normal.
43616 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
43619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43620 Header and footer decoration line
43623 \begin_layout Standard
43626 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43629 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
43630 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
43642 in the following way:
43645 \begin_layout Standard
43652 headrulewidth}{thickness}
43655 \begin_layout Standard
43656 where thickness is a size in standard units like
43669 If you don't want a line,
43670 set the thickness to 0
43671 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43677 \begin_layout Standard
43678 The lines can also be colored,
43679 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43681 If you really need this,
43682 have a look at the Internet or in section
43683 \begin_inset space ~
43687 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43698 Several header/footer lines
43701 \begin_layout Standard
43702 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
43703 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
43705 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
43706 To expand the height,
43707 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43723 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43725 \begin_inset space ~
43733 \begin_layout Standard
43740 headheight}{height}
43743 \begin_layout Standard
43748 is a size in standard units (e.
43749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43753 \begin_inset space \space{}
43761 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
43762 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
43763 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43764 logfile with the menu
43766 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43768 \begin_inset space ~
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43781 to see if you can find a warning about the package
43786 \begin_inset Index idx
43791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43794 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
43797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43809 If there is such a warning,
43810 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
43813 \begin_layout Subsection
43817 \begin_layout Standard
43818 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
43819 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
43820 This example consists of the following definition:
43823 \begin_layout Description
43825 \begin_inset space ~
43835 empty optional argument
43838 \begin_layout Description
43840 \begin_inset space ~
43844 empty optional argument
43847 \begin_layout Description
43849 \begin_inset space ~
43859 in the optional argument
43862 \begin_layout Description
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43874 in the optional argument
43877 \begin_layout Description
43879 \begin_inset space ~
43893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43897 \begin_inset Newline newline
43901 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
43905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43908 in the optional argument
43911 \begin_layout Description
43913 \begin_inset space ~
43923 empty optional argument
43926 \begin_layout Description
43929 headrulewidth set to 2
43930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43936 \begin_layout Standard
43937 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
43939 For more specialized features,
43942 see the manual of the
43948 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
43958 \begin_layout Standard
43959 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
43965 \begin_layout Standard
43969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43973 pagestyle{headings}
43979 \begin_inset Note Note
43982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43983 switches back to page style with the default headings
43991 \begin_layout Section
43992 Previewing Snippets of your Document
43993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43995 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44000 \begin_inset Index idx
44005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44012 \begin_inset Index idx
44017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44019 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44036 \begin_layout Standard
44038 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
44041 \begin_layout Subsection
44045 \begin_layout Standard
44046 To get previews working,
44047 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44053 \begin_inset Index idx
44058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44061 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
44064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44075 (on some systems named simply
44080 If it is not already installed,
44081 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
44084 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44091 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44093 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
44102 for \SpecialChar LyX
44103 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44104 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
44108 \begin_layout Subsection
44112 \begin_layout Standard
44113 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44114 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44116 activate the option
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44126 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44132 \begin_inset space ~
44136 \begin_inset space ~
44139 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
44146 \begin_inset space ~
44159 \begin_inset space ~
44164 is the multiplication factor for the size.
44167 \begin_layout Standard
44168 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
44173 \begin_inset space ~
44181 \begin_inset space ~
44189 \begin_layout Standard
44190 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
44191 and when you finish editing an inset.
44194 \begin_layout Standard
44195 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44204 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
44207 \begin_inset space ~
44213 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
44221 \begin_layout Subsection
44222 Selected document parts
44225 \begin_layout Standard
44226 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
44227 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
44228 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44231 insert a preview inset via the menu
44233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
44237 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
44238 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
44239 If you click on the preview,
44240 you can edit the previewed stuff.
44243 \begin_layout Standard
44245 To create rotated boxes,
44246 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44253 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
44258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44265 is explained in section
44267 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
44272 \begin_inset space ~
44282 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
44283 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
44284 the final rotated boxes,
44285 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
44286 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
44287 Here is the result:
44290 \begin_layout Standard
44291 \begin_inset Preview
44293 \begin_layout Standard
44298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44302 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
44308 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
44318 height_special "totalheight"
44323 backgroundcolor "none"
44326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44351 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
44357 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
44364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44379 \begin_layout Standard
44380 Previewing works also for colors.
44381 In this example a special framed,
44382 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44400 is explained in section
44407 \begin_inset space ~
44420 \begin_layout Standard
44421 \begin_inset Preview
44423 \begin_layout Standard
44427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44446 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
44451 This is text within a colored,
44456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44471 \begin_layout Standard
44472 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
44478 \begin_layout Standard
44479 If \SpecialChar LyX
44480 does not show a preview,
44481 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
44482 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44483 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
44485 If \SpecialChar LyX
44486 cannot create a preview,
44487 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
44489 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
44490 Code and don't know if it is correct,
44491 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
44494 \begin_layout Subsection
44499 \begin_layout Standard
44500 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44501 source of the whole document or parts of it.
44504 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
44506 \begin_inset space ~
44511 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44513 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
44514 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
44516 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
44517 To view the whole document as source,
44518 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
44524 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
44526 but note that if you have several documents open,
44527 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
44529 not just the one which is open at the time.
44532 \begin_layout Section
44533 Advanced Find and Replace
44534 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44536 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
44541 \begin_inset Index idx
44546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 \begin_inset Index idx
44558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44567 \begin_layout Subsection
44571 \begin_layout Standard
44572 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
44573 allows for searching of complex,
44574 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
44576 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
44577 The key-features are:
44580 \begin_layout Itemize
44581 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
44582 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
44583 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
44584 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
44587 \begin_layout Itemize
44588 Search may be format-insensitive,
44589 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
44592 and even mathematics),
44593 or it may be format-sensitive,
44596 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
44599 \begin_layout Itemize
44600 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
44601 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
44604 \begin_layout Itemize
44605 Search may be widened to a specific
44611 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44615 \begin_inset space ~
44618 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
44619 all the open files,
44620 or all the manuals available from the
44627 \begin_layout Itemize
44628 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
44629 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
44630 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44634 \begin_inset space ~
44639 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
44642 \begin_layout Subsection
44646 \begin_layout Standard
44647 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
44649 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
44662 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
44665 ) or the toolbar button
44668 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
44674 Advanced Find and Replace
44679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44683 \begin_layout Standard
44689 mini-editor a simple word,
44690 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
44693 \begin_inset space ~
44698 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
44701 arg "paragraph-break"
44705 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
44707 bold or normal face,
44708 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
44712 arg "paragraph-break"
44715 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
44719 searches backwards.
44722 \begin_layout Standard
44726 \begin_inset space ~
44731 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44744 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
44747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44748 Searching for mathematics
44751 \begin_layout Standard
44752 Mathematical formulas,
44754 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
44757 or something more complex like
44758 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
44762 may be searched for by typing them in the
44767 When searching for a formula,
44768 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
44769 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
44770 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
44776 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44780 \begin_layout Standard
44781 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
44782 This is done by switching to the
44786 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
44799 \begin_layout Itemize
44800 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
44803 \begin_layout Itemize
44804 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
44805 and within the same text style only.
44808 \begin_layout Itemize
44809 a normal word in a section heading,
44810 and searching for it,
44811 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
44813 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
44814 in addition to a section style,
44815 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
44818 \begin_layout Itemize
44819 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
44822 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44826 \begin_layout Standard
44827 The entries made in the
44831 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
44834 \begin_inset space ~
44840 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
44845 button or alternatively press
44848 arg "paragraph-break"
44855 while the cursor is in the
44858 \begin_inset space ~
44866 \begin_layout Standard
44867 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
44869 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
44872 \begin_layout Itemize
44873 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
44874 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
44875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44882 with its typewriter version
44883 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44897 \begin_layout Itemize
44898 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
44899 for example replacing occurrences of
44900 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44904 \begin_inset Formula $R$
44908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44916 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
44920 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44923 (you may want to enable the
44926 \begin_inset space ~
44934 \begin_inset space ~
44939 options and disable the
44948 in order to avoid replacing all
44949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44953 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44956 letters occurring in normal text),
44958 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
44962 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
44967 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
44971 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
44977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44981 \begin_layout Standard
44982 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
44986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44987 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
44989 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44991 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
45001 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
45006 This is done with the context menu
45008 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45009 Insert Regular Expression
45011 while the cursor is in the
45016 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
45020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45021 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
45024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45028 \begin_inset space ~
45031 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
45033 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
45039 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
45040 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
45041 Examples of using such a feature may be:
45044 \begin_layout Enumerate
45045 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
45051 editor the fraction
45052 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
45056 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45059 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
45062 \begin_layout Enumerate
45063 Searching for all text with a given style:
45066 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
45070 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814407
45074 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
45075 Adhere to search string formatting of
45076 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814409
45078 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
45084 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45086 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814412
45088 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45092 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814414
45096 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
45098 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814534
45100 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814534
45104 \change_deleted -712698321 1686814548
45110 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814554
45111 in this section pressed
45117 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45122 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
45123 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
45126 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
45129 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
45130 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
45132 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
45133 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
45137 \begin_layout Description
45139 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45140 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
45141 \change_inserted -712698321 1686814961
45143 as with the other options,
45144 the setting of the search string)
45145 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
45149 \begin_layout Description
45151 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
45153 \begin_inset space ~
45156 color colored text like cyan,
45161 \begin_layout Description
45163 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45173 \begin_layout Description
45175 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
45177 \begin_inset space ~
45184 \begin_layout Description
45186 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
45188 \begin_inset space ~
45197 \begin_layout Description
45199 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45210 \begin_layout Description
45212 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
45213 Emph/noun Semantic Markup:
45218 \begin_layout Description
45220 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
45227 \begin_layout Description
45229 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
45230 Strike-through Single,
45234 \begin_layout Description
45236 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
45237 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
45240 \begin_layout Description
45242 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
45244 \begin_inset space ~
45257 \begin_layout Standard
45259 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
45260 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
45261 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45265 and referring back to them through
45266 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45271 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
45277 try searching with the regexp
45278 \begin_inset Newline newline
45282 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
45294 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
45295 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
45300 \begin_inset Newline newline
45303 in order to find word repetitions,
45307 \begin_layout Standard
45308 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
45309 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
45315 \begin_layout Standard
45316 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45325 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
45326 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
45327 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
45329 \begin_inset space ~
45333 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
45336 always refers to the first occurrence of
45337 \begin_inset Formula $()$
45340 in all entered regexps.
45348 \begin_layout Section
45350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45352 name "sec:Spellchecking"
45357 \begin_inset Index idx
45362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45371 \begin_layout Standard
45373 has a built-in spell checker.
45376 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45384 key or the toolbar button
45387 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45390 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
45391 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
45392 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
45393 Whenever an unknown word is found,
45394 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
45395 In the spellchecker sidebar,
45396 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
45397 if any could be found.
45398 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
45403 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
45404 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
45407 \begin_layout Standard
45409 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
45411 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45415 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
45417 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
45418 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
45421 \begin_inset space ~
45429 arg "dialog-show character"
45432 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
45434 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
45437 \begin_layout Standard
45438 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
45439 can be downloaded from here:
45440 \begin_inset Newline newline
45444 \begin_inset Flex URL
45447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45449 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
45451 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
45452 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
45453 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
45461 \begin_inset Newline newline
45465 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
45467 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
45468 You should download
45471 \begin_inset space ~
45474 files for each language
45475 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
45480 link at the end of the opened webpage)
45483 To install a dictionary on Windows,
45485 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45492 files into \SpecialChar LyX
45493 's installation subfolder
45501 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45503 \begin_inset Newline newline
45506 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
45507 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
45508 but in most cases these are
45528 is the language code.
45531 \begin_layout Subsection
45535 \begin_layout Standard
45538 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45539 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45541 \begin_inset space ~
45544 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45547 you can set the following things:
45550 \begin_layout Description
45552 \begin_inset space ~
45555 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
45556 should use for spell checking.
45557 Depending on your platform,
45568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
45570 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
45585 \begin_inset space ~
45588 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
45591 \begin_layout Description
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45596 language If this field is not empty,
45598 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
45599 no matter what the document language is.
45602 \begin_layout Description
45604 \begin_inset space ~
45607 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
45609 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45613 \begin_inset space \space{}
45617 This should normally not be needed.
45620 \begin_layout Description
45622 \begin_inset space ~
45626 \begin_inset space ~
45629 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
45630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45640 \begin_layout Description
45642 \begin_inset space ~
45645 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
45646 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
45647 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
45648 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
45649 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
45652 \begin_layout Description
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45658 \begin_inset space ~
45662 \begin_inset space ~
45665 comments If enabled,
45666 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
45669 \begin_layout Section
45671 \begin_inset Index idx
45676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45685 name "sec:Thesaurus"
45692 \begin_layout Standard
45694 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
45695 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
45696 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
45704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45705 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45707 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
45718 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
45722 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
45723 which are available for many languages.
45726 \begin_layout Standard
45727 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
45731 \begin_layout Subsection
45732 Setting up the thesaurus
45735 \begin_layout Standard
45744 thesauri consist of two files per language:
45745 A file with the suffix
45749 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
45754 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
45755 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45759 \begin_inset space ~
45768 the US English files are named:
45771 \begin_layout Itemize
45775 \begin_layout Itemize
45779 \begin_layout Standard
45788 and its thesaurus installed,
45789 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
45792 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45793 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45794 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45796 \begin_inset space ~
45801 ) to the path where they are installed.
45805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45807 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
45808 typical locations are
45815 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
45820 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
45825 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
45829 dictionaries are to be found at
45835 LibreOffice-<Version>
45843 the default location is
45845 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
45846 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45847 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
45848 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
45849 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45850 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
45859 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
45860 installation process,
45861 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
45864 \begin_layout Standard
45865 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
45867 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
45869 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
45872 thesaurus dictionaries,
45873 you can download them from here:
45874 \begin_inset Newline newline
45878 \begin_inset Flex URL
45881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45883 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
45885 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
45886 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
45887 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
45897 \begin_layout Standard
45898 To install a new dictionary,
45899 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
45901 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45902 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45903 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45905 \begin_inset space ~
45910 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
45912 If this path is not defined yet,
45913 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
45917 \begin_layout Standard
45919 you can also install new dictionaries via
45921 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
45926 via your package manager (look for
45932 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
45936 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
45937 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
45939 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45945 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45946 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45947 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
45949 \begin_inset space ~
45954 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
45957 \begin_layout Subsection
45958 Using the thesaurus
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45962 To start the thesaurus,
45965 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45968 or the toolbar button
45971 arg "thesaurus-entry"
45974 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
45975 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
45976 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
45978 for some languages (such as English),
45979 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
45980 but also generic terms (such as
45989 related terms (such as
45992 \begin_inset space ~
46005 \begin_inset space ~
46015 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
46025 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
46028 \begin_layout Standard
46029 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
46030 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
46031 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
46034 \begin_layout Standard
46035 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
46041 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
46043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46047 \begin_inset space \space{}
46050 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
46051 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
46052 infinitive for verbs).
46054 looking up the word form
46059 while results are shown for the word form
46064 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
46065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46069 \begin_inset space \space{}
46081 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
46082 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
46083 thus the ending remains).
46086 \begin_layout Section
46088 \begin_inset Index idx
46093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46100 \begin_inset Index idx
46105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46107 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46122 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46124 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
46131 \begin_layout Standard
46132 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
46133 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
46134 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
46136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46138 \begin_inset space ~
46141 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46143 \begin_inset space ~
46151 \begin_layout Standard
46152 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
46167 The color depends on the author that made the change.
46168 You can change the color in
46170 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46171 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
46173 \begin_inset space ~
46177 \begin_inset space ~
46182 \SpecialChar menuseparator
46188 \begin_inset Index idx
46193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46195 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46209 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
46210 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
46211 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
46214 arg "changes-merge"
46220 \begin_layout Standard
46221 When change tracking is activated,
46222 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
46224 \begin_inset Index idx
46229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46231 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46248 \begin_layout Standard
46249 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46255 \begin_layout Standard
46256 \begin_inset Graphics
46257 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
46265 \begin_layout Standard
46266 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46272 \begin_layout Standard
46273 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
46276 \begin_layout Standard
46277 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46283 \begin_layout Standard
46284 \begin_inset Tabular
46285 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
46286 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46287 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46288 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46289 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46298 arg "changes-track"
46306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46312 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46314 \begin_inset space ~
46317 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46319 \begin_inset space ~
46328 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 arg "changes-output"
46345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46351 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46353 \begin_inset space ~
46356 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46358 \begin_inset space ~
46362 \begin_inset space ~
46366 \begin_inset space ~
46375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46396 Jumps to the next change
46402 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46411 arg "change-accept"
46419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46427 \begin_inset space ~
46430 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46432 \begin_inset space ~
46441 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46450 arg "change-reject"
46458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46464 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46466 \begin_inset space ~
46469 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46471 \begin_inset space ~
46480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46489 arg "changes-merge"
46497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46505 \begin_inset space ~
46508 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46510 \begin_inset space ~
46519 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46528 arg "all-changes-accept"
46536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46542 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46544 \begin_inset space ~
46547 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46549 \begin_inset space ~
46553 \begin_inset space ~
46562 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46563 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46571 arg "all-changes-reject"
46579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46585 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46587 \begin_inset space ~
46590 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
46592 \begin_inset space ~
46596 \begin_inset space ~
46605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46629 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46631 \begin_inset space ~
46640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46663 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
46665 \begin_inset space ~
46681 \begin_layout Standard
46682 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46688 \begin_layout Standard
46689 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
46690 especially no format changes like from
46709 \begin_layout Standard
46710 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
46712 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
46713 When you merge changes,
46714 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
46715 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
46716 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
46717 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
46720 \begin_layout Standard
46721 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
46724 \begin_layout Standard
46726 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
46727 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
46733 \begin_inset Index idx
46738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46741 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46756 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
46759 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46766 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
46772 \begin_layout Section
46773 Comparison of Documents
46774 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46776 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
46781 \begin_inset Index idx
46786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46787 Comparison of documents
46795 \begin_layout Standard
46796 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
46799 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46803 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
46804 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
46805 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
46806 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
46809 \begin_inset space ~
46813 \begin_inset space ~
46817 \begin_inset space ~
46826 \begin_inset space ~
46830 \begin_inset space ~
46834 \begin_inset space ~
46838 \begin_inset space ~
46842 \begin_inset space ~
46846 \begin_inset space ~
46851 enables the change tracking option
46854 \begin_inset space ~
46858 \begin_inset space ~
46862 \begin_inset space ~
46867 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
46870 \begin_layout Section
46871 International Support
46872 \begin_inset Index idx
46877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46878 International support
46886 \begin_layout Standard
46887 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
46888 with any language you want.
46889 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
46892 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46894 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
46902 \begin_layout Standard
46905 also supports phonetic symbols,
46907 \begin_inset space ~
46911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46913 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
46921 \begin_layout Subsection
46923 \begin_inset Index idx
46928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46945 \begin_inset Index idx
46950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46952 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46967 \begin_inset Index idx
46972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46974 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
46977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46991 \begin_layout Standard
46994 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46995 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46998 dialog lets you set
47001 the quote style and character encoding
47006 \begin_layout Standard
47011 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47016 \begin_inset space ~
47021 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
47022 For details about the different encoding options see section
47023 \begin_inset space ~
47027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47029 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47037 \begin_layout Subsection
47038 Keyboard mapping configuration
47039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47041 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
47048 \begin_layout Standard
47049 If you have for example a U.
47050 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47053 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
47054 you can use an alternate keymap.
47056 if you want to write in Italian,
47057 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
47058 to use an Italian keymap.
47061 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47062 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47063 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
47066 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
47068 \begin_inset space ~
47072 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47074 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
47080 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
47083 \begin_layout Standard
47085 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
47089 normally write in Italian on a U.
47090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47093 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
47095 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
47096 This and many other customizations are explained in the
47103 \begin_layout Chapter
47106 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47108 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
47115 \begin_layout Standard
47116 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
47117 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
47120 \begin_layout Section
47122 \begin_inset Index idx
47127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47129 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
47132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47146 \begin_layout Standard
47151 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
47154 \begin_layout Subsection
47158 \begin_layout Standard
47159 Creates a new document.
47162 \begin_layout Subsection
47166 \begin_layout Standard
47167 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
47168 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
47169 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
47171 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
47173 templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring writing tasks.
47178 \begin_layout Subsection
47182 \begin_layout Standard
47186 \begin_layout Subsection
47190 \begin_layout Standard
47191 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
47192 Click there on a file to open it.
47195 \begin_layout Subsection
47197 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
47201 \begin_layout Standard
47203 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
47204 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
47208 \begin_layout Subsection
47212 \begin_layout Standard
47213 Closes the current document.
47216 \begin_layout Subsection
47220 \begin_layout Standard
47221 Closes all opened documents.
47224 \begin_layout Subsection
47228 \begin_layout Standard
47229 Saves the actual document.
47232 \begin_layout Subsection
47236 \begin_layout Standard
47237 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
47238 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
47242 \begin_layout Subsection
47244 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
47248 \begin_layout Standard
47250 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
47251 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use as a template.
47256 \begin_layout Subsection
47260 \begin_layout Standard
47261 Saves all opened documents.
47264 \begin_layout Subsection
47268 \begin_layout Standard
47269 Reloads the actual document from disk.
47272 \begin_layout Subsection
47276 \begin_layout Standard
47277 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
47278 It is described in the section
47280 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
47285 Additional Features
47290 \begin_layout Subsection
47294 \begin_layout Standard
47295 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
47301 plain text files and comma separated,
47302 table-like text files (CSV).
47303 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
47307 \begin_layout Standard
47308 When using the menu entry
47311 \begin_inset space ~
47317 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
47318 when using the menu entry
47321 \begin_inset space ~
47325 \begin_inset space ~
47329 \begin_inset space ~
47335 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
47336 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
47339 \begin_layout Subsection
47341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47343 name "subsec:Export"
47350 \begin_layout Standard
47351 You can export your document to various file formats.
47352 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47354 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
47355 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
47356 during its configuration.
47359 \begin_layout Standard
47360 Here is a list of all available entries;
47361 some of them are explained in detail in section
47362 \begin_inset space ~
47366 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47368 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47376 \begin_layout Description
47382 \begin_inset space ~
47385 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
47387 \begin_inset space ~
47390 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
47391 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
47392 \begin_inset Newline newline
47395 Since \SpecialChar LyX
47396 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
47400 \begin_layout Description
47401 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
47406 \begin_layout Description
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47411 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
47416 \begin_layout Description
47417 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
47418 's native DVI-format.
47419 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
47421 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
47428 \begin_layout Description
47429 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
47432 \begin_layout Description
47434 \begin_inset space ~
47441 ) DVI-format using the program
47443 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47447 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
47452 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47461 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
47469 \begin_layout Description
47471 \begin_inset space ~
47474 (cropped) the same as
47478 but with cropped page margins.
47481 \begin_layout Description
47483 \begin_inset space ~
47486 Dot text file with code in the programming language
47490 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
47495 \begin_layout Description
47500 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47509 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
47517 \begin_layout Description
47519 \begin_inset space ~
47523 \begin_inset space ~
47526 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
47531 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
47538 \begin_layout Description
47542 \begin_inset space ~
47551 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47552 source that is compilable with the program
47554 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47558 \begin_layout Description
47562 \begin_inset space ~
47567 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47569 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
47579 \begin_layout Description
47583 \begin_inset space ~
47588 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47590 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
47591 only this format is readable by the
47598 \begin_layout Description
47602 \begin_inset space ~
47611 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47612 source that is compilable with the program
47618 \begin_layout Description
47620 \begin_inset space ~
47624 \begin_inset space ~
47631 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47632 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
47637 \begin_layout Description
47639 \begin_inset space ~
47642 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
47643 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
47645 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47649 \begin_inset space \space{}
47654 \begin_inset space ~
47659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47674 represent the version number)
47677 \begin_layout Description
47679 \begin_inset space ~
47683 \begin_inset space ~
47686 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
47688 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47693 \begin_layout Description
47694 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
47695 's internal XHTML engine
47698 \begin_layout Description
47700 \begin_inset space ~
47704 \begin_inset space ~
47708 \begin_inset space ~
47712 \begin_inset space ~
47715 XML Office Open XML file,
47721 For the conversion the program
47730 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47733 \begin_layout Description
47734 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
47739 \begin_layout Description
47741 \begin_inset space ~
47744 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
47754 For the conversion the program
47763 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47766 \begin_layout Description
47768 \begin_inset space ~
47771 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
47772 For the conversion the program
47781 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
47784 \begin_layout Description
47786 \begin_inset space ~
47789 (cropped) the same as
47792 \begin_inset space ~
47797 but with cropped page margins
47800 \begin_layout Description
47804 \begin_inset space ~
47809 PDF-format using the program
47814 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47817 \begin_layout Description
47821 \begin_inset space ~
47825 \begin_inset space ~
47833 \begin_inset space ~
47838 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
47839 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47843 \begin_inset space \space{}
47846 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
47849 \begin_layout Description
47853 \begin_inset space ~
47858 PDF-format using the program
47860 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47864 produces PDF-files directly
47867 \begin_layout Description
47871 \begin_inset space ~
47876 PDF-format using the program
47881 produces PDF-files directly
47884 \begin_layout Description
47888 \begin_inset space ~
47893 PDF-format using the program
47898 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
47901 \begin_layout Description
47905 \begin_inset space ~
47910 PDF-format using the program
47916 produces PDF-files directly
47919 \begin_layout Description
47923 \begin_inset space ~
47931 \begin_layout Description
47935 \begin_inset space ~
47939 \begin_inset space ~
47945 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
47950 \begin_layout Description
47955 PostScript format using the program
47964 options see section
47965 \begin_inset space ~
47969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47971 reference "subsec:General-output"
47979 \begin_layout Description
47980 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47981 source and also code in the statistical programming language
47994 it is possible to use
47998 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
48002 \begin_layout Standard
48003 If one of the menu entries
48011 \begin_inset space ~
48021 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48023 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
48026 \begin_inset space ~
48030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48032 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
48038 \begin_inset Index idx
48043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48044 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
48053 \begin_layout Subsection
48057 \begin_layout Standard
48058 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
48061 \begin_inset space ~
48065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48067 reference "sec:Paths"
48073 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
48082 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
48083 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
48084 's preferences as described in section
48085 \begin_inset space ~
48089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48091 reference "subsec:Converters"
48099 \begin_layout Subsection
48100 New and Close Window
48103 \begin_layout Standard
48104 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
48108 \begin_layout Subsection
48112 \begin_layout Standard
48113 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
48116 \begin_layout Section
48118 \begin_inset Index idx
48123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48125 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48142 \begin_layout Subsection
48146 \begin_layout Standard
48147 Described in section
48148 \begin_inset space ~
48152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48154 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
48162 \begin_layout Subsection
48170 \begin_layout Standard
48171 Described in section
48172 \begin_inset space ~
48176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48178 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48186 \begin_layout Subsection
48190 \begin_layout Standard
48191 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
48192 If the cursor is outside an inset,
48193 the whole document will be selected.
48196 \begin_layout Subsection
48200 \begin_layout Standard
48201 Selects the whole document.
48204 \begin_layout Subsection
48205 Find & Replace (Quick)
48208 \begin_layout Standard
48209 Described in section
48210 \begin_inset space ~
48214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48216 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
48224 \begin_layout Subsection
48225 Find & Replace (Advanced)
48228 \begin_layout Standard
48229 Described in section
48230 \begin_inset space ~
48234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48236 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
48244 \begin_layout Subsection
48245 Move Paragraph Up/Down
48248 \begin_layout Standard
48249 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
48252 \begin_layout Subsection
48254 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48258 \begin_layout Standard
48260 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
48261 Described in section
48262 \begin_inset space ~
48266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48268 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48278 \begin_layout Subsection
48280 \begin_inset Index idx
48285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48287 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48304 \begin_layout Standard
48305 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
48306 line spacing and label width.
48307 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
48310 \begin_layout Standard
48311 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
48317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48318 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48320 \begin_inset space ~
48326 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
48330 \begin_layout Subsection
48332 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
48336 \begin_layout Standard
48338 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48339 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text passages.
48343 \begin_layout Enumerate
48345 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
48346 Customize text properties by means of the
48352 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
48356 this is described in section
48357 \begin_inset space ~
48361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48363 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
48371 \begin_layout Enumerate
48373 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
48374 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
48376 Apply last settings
48379 \begin_layout Enumerate
48381 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
48382 Change the casing of selected text (
48399 \begin_layout Subsection
48401 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
48405 \begin_layout Standard
48407 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48408 This sub-menu only appears
48409 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
48411 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
48412 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case of this document:
48438 \begin_inset space ~
48442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48444 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
48454 \begin_layout Subsection
48455 Table and Rows & Columns
48458 \begin_layout Standard
48459 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
48460 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
48461 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
48464 \begin_layout Subsection
48468 \begin_layout Standard
48469 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
48470 It will dissolve this inset.
48471 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
48474 \begin_layout Subsection
48478 \begin_layout Standard
48479 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
48480 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
48483 \begin_layout Subsection
48484 Increase/Decrease List Depth
48487 \begin_layout Standard
48488 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
48489 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
48490 \begin_inset space ~
48494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48496 reference "sec:Nesting"
48502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48504 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
48512 \begin_layout Section
48514 \begin_inset Index idx
48519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48521 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48538 \begin_layout Standard
48539 At the bottom of the
48543 menu the opened documents are listed.
48546 \begin_layout Subsection
48547 Open/Close all Insets
48550 \begin_layout Standard
48551 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
48554 \begin_layout Subsection
48555 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
48558 \begin_layout Standard
48559 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
48562 \begin_layout Standard
48563 Math macros are described in the
48570 \begin_layout Subsection
48574 \begin_layout Standard
48575 Shows the outline window as described in sections
48576 \begin_inset space ~
48580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48582 reference "sec:Navigating"
48588 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48590 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
48598 \begin_layout Subsection
48602 \begin_layout Standard
48603 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
48604 as described in section
48605 \begin_inset space ~
48609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48611 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
48619 \begin_layout Subsection
48623 \begin_layout Standard
48624 Opens a window showing console messages.
48625 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
48627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48631 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
48632 is processing the document.
48635 \begin_layout Subsection
48637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48639 name "subsec:Toolbars"
48644 \begin_inset Index idx
48649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48658 \begin_layout Standard
48659 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
48660 All toolbars and the
48663 \begin_inset space ~
48681 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
48683 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
48685 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
48689 \begin_layout Standard
48691 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
48695 \begin_inset space ~
48716 \begin_inset space ~
48729 \begin_inset space ~
48734 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
48737 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
48742 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
48744 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets you select
48759 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
48760 denoted in the menu with the suffix
48769 \begin_layout Standard
48774 state the toolbar is permanently shown
48775 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
48781 state it is never shown
48788 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
48789 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
48790 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively
48791 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
48793 the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
48798 \begin_layout Standard
48800 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
48801 \begin_inset space ~
48805 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48807 reference "sec:Toolbars"
48815 \begin_layout Subsection
48819 \begin_layout Standard
48823 \begin_inset space ~
48827 \begin_inset space ~
48831 \begin_inset space ~
48835 \begin_inset space ~
48839 \begin_inset space ~
48843 \begin_inset space ~
48848 will split \SpecialChar LyX
48849 's main window vertically while
48852 \begin_inset space ~
48856 \begin_inset space ~
48860 \begin_inset space ~
48864 \begin_inset space ~
48868 \begin_inset space ~
48872 \begin_inset space ~
48877 will split it horizontally.
48878 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
48879 or to view the same document,
48880 but at different positions.
48881 You can even split the main window several times to view,
48883 three or more documents at the same time.
48884 To close a split view,
48888 \begin_inset space ~
48892 \begin_inset space ~
48900 \begin_layout Subsection
48904 \begin_layout Standard
48905 Closes a split view.
48908 \begin_layout Subsection
48912 \begin_layout Standard
48913 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
48914 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
48915 's main window fullscreen.
48916 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
48918 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
48921 \begin_layout Section
48923 \begin_inset Index idx
48928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
48933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48947 \begin_layout Subsection
48951 \begin_layout Standard
48952 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
48953 \begin_inset space ~
48957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48959 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
48971 \begin_layout Subsection
48973 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48975 name "subsec:Special-Character"
48982 \begin_layout Standard
48983 Here you can insert the following characters:
48986 \begin_layout Description
48991 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48993 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
48994 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48995 -packages you have installed.
48996 You can get a complete display by checking
48999 \begin_inset space ~
49005 \begin_inset Newline newline
49009 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49018 Not all characters will be visible in the
49022 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
49023 \begin_inset space ~
49027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49029 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
49034 ) can display every character.
49042 \begin_layout Description
49043 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
49048 \begin_layout Description
49050 \begin_inset space ~
49054 \begin_inset space ~
49057 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
49058 \begin_inset space ~
49062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49064 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
49072 \begin_layout Description
49074 \begin_inset space ~
49077 Quote Inserts this quote:
49079 no matter what quote style you selected in the
49081 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49082 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49088 \begin_layout Description
49090 \begin_inset space ~
49093 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
49095 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49096 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49102 \begin_layout Description
49104 \change_deleted 177693 1654619391
49106 \change_inserted 177693 1654619396
49110 \begin_inset space ~
49113 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that
49114 \change_deleted 177693 1654619439
49116 \change_inserted 177693 1654619443
49120 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
49124 \begin_layout Description
49126 \begin_inset space ~
49129 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
49130 \SpecialChar breakableslash
49134 \begin_layout Description
49136 \begin_inset space ~
49140 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
49141 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
49147 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49152 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49158 \begin_inset space \space{}
49161 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49162 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49172 To insert a fraction use the command
49177 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49181 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49190 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49197 \begin_layout Description
49199 \begin_inset space ~
49202 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
49203 \SpecialChar menuseparator
49207 \begin_layout Description
49209 \begin_inset space ~
49213 \begin_inset Index idx
49218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49225 \begin_inset Index idx
49230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49232 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49246 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
49247 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49253 \begin_inset Index idx
49258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49261 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
49264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49276 \begin_inset Newline newline
49279 More information about this feature can be found in the
49285 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
49291 \begin_layout Description
49292 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
49297 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
49301 \begin_layout Subsection
49305 \begin_layout Standard
49306 Opens a submenu with the following options:
49309 \begin_layout Description
49310 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
49312 \begin_inset script superscript
49314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49324 \begin_layout Description
49325 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
49327 \begin_inset script subscript
49329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49338 \begin_layout Description
49340 \change_deleted 177693 1654619456
49342 \change_inserted 177693 1654619456
49346 \begin_inset space ~
49350 \change_deleted 177693 1654619466
49352 \change_inserted 177693 1654619468
49355 space as described in section
49356 \begin_inset space ~
49360 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49362 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
49370 \begin_layout Description
49372 \begin_inset space ~
49375 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
49376 \begin_inset space ~
49380 \change_inserted 177693 1654667914
49382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49384 reference "subsec:Normal-Space"
49390 \change_deleted 177693 1654667914
49392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49394 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
49404 \begin_layout Description
49406 \begin_inset space ~
49409 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
49410 \begin_inset space ~
49414 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49416 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
49424 \begin_layout Description
49426 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
49428 \begin_inset space ~
49431 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
49433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49437 \begin_inset space \space{}
49440 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
49441 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
49448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49451 To insert a fraction use the command
49456 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
49460 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
49466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49469 The visible space is hereby the character before the
49478 \begin_layout Description
49480 \begin_inset space ~
49483 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
49484 \begin_inset space ~
49488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49490 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
49498 \begin_layout Description
49500 \begin_inset space ~
49503 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
49504 \begin_inset space ~
49508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49510 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
49518 \begin_layout Description
49520 \begin_inset space ~
49523 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
49524 \begin_inset space ~
49528 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49530 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
49538 \begin_layout Description
49539 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
49540 \begin_inset space ~
49544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49546 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
49554 \begin_layout Description
49556 \begin_inset space ~
49559 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
49560 \begin_inset space ~
49564 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49566 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
49574 \begin_layout Description
49576 \begin_inset space ~
49579 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
49580 \begin_inset space ~
49584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49586 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
49594 \begin_layout Description
49596 \begin_inset space ~
49600 \begin_inset space ~
49603 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
49605 \begin_inset space ~
49609 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49611 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
49619 for a usage example.
49622 \begin_layout Description
49624 \begin_inset space ~
49628 \begin_inset space ~
49631 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
49632 \begin_inset space ~
49636 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49638 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49646 \begin_layout Description
49648 \begin_inset space ~
49651 Break Inserts a forced line break that
49652 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
49655 justifies the remaining text as described in section
49656 \begin_inset space ~
49660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49662 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
49670 \begin_layout Description
49672 \begin_inset space ~
49675 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
49676 \begin_inset space ~
49680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49682 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49690 \begin_layout Description
49692 \begin_inset space ~
49695 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
49696 as described in section
49697 \begin_inset space ~
49701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49703 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
49709 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
49713 \begin_layout Description
49715 \change_deleted 5863208 1686701518
49717 \change_inserted 5863208 1686701520
49719 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49721 \begin_inset space ~
49725 \begin_inset space ~
49728 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
49729 to prevent a page break at the given position.
49731 \begin_inset space ~
49735 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
49737 \begin_inset space ~
49741 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
49743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49745 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
49755 \begin_layout Description
49757 \begin_inset space ~
49760 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
49761 \begin_inset space ~
49765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49767 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49775 \begin_layout Description
49777 \begin_inset space ~
49781 \begin_inset space ~
49784 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
49785 \begin_inset space ~
49789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49791 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
49799 \begin_layout Subsection
49801 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49805 \begin_layout Standard
49807 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49808 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
49809 The submenu allows you to insert
49812 \begin_layout Description
49814 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49816 \begin_inset space ~
49819 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
49822 \begin_layout Description
49824 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49826 \begin_inset space ~
49830 \begin_inset space ~
49833 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last save)
49836 \begin_layout Description
49838 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49840 \begin_inset space ~
49843 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
49846 \begin_layout Description
49848 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49850 \begin_inset space ~
49853 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
49856 \begin_layout Description
49858 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49860 \begin_inset space ~
49864 \begin_inset space ~
49867 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last save)
49870 \begin_layout Description
49872 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49874 \begin_inset space ~
49877 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
49880 \begin_layout Description
49882 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
49884 \begin_inset space ~
49888 \begin_inset space ~
49892 \begin_inset space ~
49895 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
49898 \begin_layout Description
49900 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
49902 \begin_inset space ~
49906 \begin_inset space ~
49909 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
49911 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
49914 \begin_layout Description
49916 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49918 \begin_inset space ~
49921 Name inserts the user name as specified in
49923 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49924 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49930 \begin_layout Description
49932 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49934 \begin_inset space ~
49937 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
49939 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49940 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49946 \begin_layout Description
49948 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
49949 Other\SpecialChar ldots
49950 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
49953 \begin_layout Subsection
49956 List/Contents/References
49959 \begin_layout Standard
49960 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
49964 \begin_inset space ~
49988 are described in section
49989 \begin_inset space ~
49993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49995 reference "sec:toc"
50005 is described in section
50006 \begin_inset space ~
50010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50012 reference "sec:Index"
50022 is described in section
50023 \begin_inset space ~
50027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50029 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50036 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50039 is described in section
50040 \begin_inset space ~
50044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50046 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
50054 \begin_layout Subsection
50058 \begin_layout Standard
50060 as described in section
50061 \begin_inset space ~
50065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50067 reference "sec:Floats"
50072 and in detail the chapter
50079 \begin_inset space ~
50087 \begin_layout Subsection
50091 \begin_layout Standard
50093 described in section
50094 \begin_inset space ~
50098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50100 reference "sec:Notes"
50108 \begin_layout Subsection
50112 \begin_layout Standard
50113 Inserts a branch inset,
50115 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
50116 Branches are described in section
50117 \begin_inset space ~
50121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50123 reference "sec:Branches"
50131 \begin_layout Subsection
50135 \begin_layout Standard
50136 Inserts document class-specific insets.
50137 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
50138 An example is the document class
50139 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
50141 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50149 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
50153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50158 with three custom insets.
50161 Flex insets and InsetLayout
50165 Installing New Document Classes,
50166 The Layout file format
50172 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
50175 \begin_layout Subsection
50177 \begin_inset Index idx
50182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50191 \begin_layout Standard
50192 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
50193 For more information see chapter
50195 External Document Parts
50198 \begin_inset space ~
50204 \begin_layout Subsection
50206 \begin_inset Index idx
50211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50220 \begin_layout Standard
50221 Inserts a box in a certain style.
50222 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
50229 \begin_inset space ~
50237 \begin_layout Subsection
50241 \begin_layout Standard
50246 dialog as described in section
50247 \begin_inset space ~
50251 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50253 reference "sec:Bibliography"
50261 \begin_layout Subsection
50265 \begin_layout Standard
50270 as described in section
50271 \begin_inset space ~
50275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50277 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50285 \begin_layout Subsection
50289 \begin_layout Standard
50294 as described in section
50295 \begin_inset space ~
50299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50301 reference "sec:Cross-References"
50309 \begin_layout Subsection
50311 \begin_inset Index idx
50316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50323 \begin_inset Index idx
50328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50330 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50340 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50357 \begin_layout Standard
50358 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
50359 Floats are described in section
50360 \begin_inset space ~
50364 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50366 reference "sec:Floats"
50372 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
50375 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
50383 \begin_inset space ~
50391 \begin_layout Subsection
50395 \begin_layout Standard
50396 Inserts an index entry as described in section
50397 \begin_inset space ~
50401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50403 reference "sec:Index"
50411 \begin_layout Subsection
50415 \begin_layout Standard
50416 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
50417 \begin_inset space ~
50421 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50423 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
50431 \begin_layout Subsection
50435 \begin_layout Standard
50436 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
50437 Tables are described in section
50438 \begin_inset space ~
50442 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50444 reference "sec:Tables"
50449 and in detail in the chapter
50456 \begin_inset space ~
50464 \begin_layout Subsection
50468 \begin_layout Standard
50474 Graphics are described in section
50475 \begin_inset space ~
50479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50481 reference "sec:Graphics"
50489 \begin_layout Subsection
50493 \begin_layout Standard
50494 Inserts a URL as described in section
50495 \begin_inset space ~
50499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50501 reference "subsec:URLs"
50509 \begin_layout Subsection
50513 \begin_layout Standard
50514 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
50515 \begin_inset space ~
50519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50521 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
50529 \begin_layout Subsection
50533 \begin_layout Standard
50534 Inserts a footnote as described in section
50535 \begin_inset space ~
50539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50541 reference "sec:Footnotes"
50549 \begin_layout Subsection
50553 \begin_layout Standard
50554 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
50555 \begin_inset space ~
50559 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50561 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
50569 \begin_layout Subsection
50572 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
50575 \begin_layout Standard
50576 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
50578 \begin_inset space ~
50582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50584 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
50589 for an explanation.
50592 \begin_layout Subsection
50596 \begin_layout Standard
50597 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
50598 in or behind a section heading,
50599 title or caption of a float.
50600 Inserts a short title as described in section
50601 \begin_inset space ~
50605 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50607 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
50615 \begin_layout Subsection
50620 \begin_layout Standard
50621 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
50622 Code box as described in section
50623 \begin_inset space ~
50627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50629 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
50637 \begin_layout Subsection
50639 \begin_inset Index idx
50644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50653 \begin_layout Standard
50654 Inserts a program listings box.
50655 Program listings are explained in the chapter
50657 Program Code Listings
50662 \begin_inset space ~
50670 \begin_layout Subsection
50672 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50676 \begin_layout Standard
50678 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
50679 Inserts the actual date.
50680 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
50686 \begin_layout Subsection
50690 \begin_layout Standard
50691 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
50692 \begin_inset space ~
50696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50698 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
50706 \begin_layout Section
50708 \begin_inset Index idx
50713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50715 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50732 \begin_layout Standard
50733 This menu lists the existing chapters,
50738 \begin_inset space ~
50741 of the current document.
50742 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
50745 \begin_layout Subsection
50749 \begin_layout Standard
50750 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
50751 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
50754 \begin_inset space ~
50758 To create bookmarks for this example,
50760 \begin_inset space ~
50763 2.5 and use the submenu
50766 \begin_inset space ~
50770 \begin_inset space ~
50777 \begin_inset space ~
50783 \begin_inset space ~
50787 \begin_inset space ~
50793 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
50796 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
50802 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
50805 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
50808 \begin_layout Standard
50810 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
50811 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
50817 \begin_inset space ~
50822 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
50825 \begin_inset space ~
50830 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
50833 \begin_layout Subsection
50839 \begin_layout Standard
50840 Jump to the next note,
50842 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
50845 \begin_layout Subsection
50849 \begin_layout Standard
50850 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
50851 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
50852 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
50855 \begin_inset space ~
50859 \begin_inset space ~
50867 \begin_layout Subsection
50871 \begin_layout Standard
50872 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
50875 The \SpecialChar LyX
50876 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
50878 \begin_inset space ~
50886 \begin_inset space ~
50891 manual for a detailed description.
50894 \begin_layout Section
50896 \begin_inset Index idx
50901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50903 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
50906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50920 \begin_layout Subsection
50924 \begin_layout Standard
50925 Change Tracking is described in section
50926 \begin_inset space ~
50930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50932 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
50940 \begin_layout Subsection
50948 \begin_layout Standard
50949 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
50950 by viewing or exporting a document,
50951 this menu will be enabled.
50952 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50954 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
50956 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
50957 \begin_inset Newline newline
50960 With the help of the logfile,
50961 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50965 \begin_layout Standard
50968 Open Containing Directory
50970 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
50971 's temporary folder for the document.
50972 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
50973 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
50974 For example some journals require to send the
50978 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50982 \begin_layout Subsection
50983 Start Appendix Here
50986 \begin_layout Standard
50987 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
50988 \begin_inset space ~
50992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50994 reference "sec:Appendices"
51002 \begin_layout Subsection
51004 \begin_inset space ~
51010 \begin_layout Standard
51011 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
51013 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51014 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51015 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51017 \begin_inset space ~
51021 \begin_inset space ~
51028 \begin_inset space ~
51032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51034 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51039 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
51042 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51043 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51045 \begin_inset space ~
51048 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51050 \begin_inset space ~
51053 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51055 \begin_inset space ~
51059 \begin_inset space ~
51066 \begin_inset space ~
51070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51072 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51077 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
51078 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51080 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51081 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51083 \begin_inset space ~
51086 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51088 \begin_inset space ~
51091 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51096 \begin_inset space ~
51100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51102 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51108 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51109 when it is first configured.
51110 The default output format is
51113 \begin_inset space ~
51121 \begin_layout Subsection
51122 View (Other Formats)
51125 \begin_layout Standard
51126 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
51127 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
51128 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
51129 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51130 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
51132 All possible formats are listed in section
51133 \begin_inset space ~
51137 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51139 reference "subsec:Export"
51145 You should at least see the menu entry
51151 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51153 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
51155 \begin_inset space ~
51159 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51161 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51167 \begin_inset Index idx
51172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51173 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51182 \begin_layout Standard
51183 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
51184 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
51186 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51187 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51189 \begin_inset space ~
51192 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51194 \begin_inset space ~
51197 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51202 \begin_inset space ~
51206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51208 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51214 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
51215 when it is first configured.
51218 \begin_layout Subsection
51220 \begin_inset space ~
51226 \begin_layout Standard
51227 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
51230 \begin_layout Subsection
51231 Update (Other Formats)
51234 \begin_layout Standard
51235 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
51238 \begin_layout Subsection
51239 View Master Document
51242 \begin_layout Standard
51243 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51249 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51259 \begin_inset space ~
51264 manual for more information on this topic).
51265 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
51267 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
51271 \begin_inset space ~
51275 \begin_inset space ~
51280 generates the output of the whole book,
51285 will just output the chapter alone.
51288 \begin_layout Standard
51289 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51291 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51292 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51293 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51295 \begin_inset space ~
51299 \begin_inset space ~
51306 \begin_inset space ~
51310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51312 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51317 ) or in the preferences (menu
51319 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51320 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51322 \begin_inset space ~
51325 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51327 \begin_inset space ~
51330 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51332 \begin_inset space ~
51336 \begin_inset space ~
51343 \begin_inset space ~
51347 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51349 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51357 \begin_layout Subsection
51358 Update Master Document
51361 \begin_layout Standard
51362 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
51364 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51378 \begin_inset space ~
51383 manual for more information on this topic).
51384 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
51387 \begin_layout Standard
51388 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
51390 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51391 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51392 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
51394 \begin_inset space ~
51398 \begin_inset space ~
51405 \begin_inset space ~
51409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51411 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
51416 ) or in the preferences (menu
51418 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
51419 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
51421 \begin_inset space ~
51424 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
51426 \begin_inset space ~
51429 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
51431 \begin_inset space ~
51435 \begin_inset space ~
51442 \begin_inset space ~
51446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51448 reference "sec:File-Formats"
51456 \begin_layout Subsection
51458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51460 name "subsec:Compressed"
51467 \begin_layout Standard
51468 Un/compresses the current document.
51469 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
51471 Additional Features
51473 manual for details).
51476 \begin_layout Subsection
51480 \begin_layout Standard
51481 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
51484 \begin_layout Subsection
51488 \begin_layout Standard
51489 The document settings are described in appendix
51490 \begin_inset space ~
51494 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51496 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
51504 \begin_layout Section
51506 \begin_inset Index idx
51511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51513 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51530 \begin_layout Subsection
51534 \begin_layout Standard
51535 Spell checking is explained in section
51536 \begin_inset space ~
51540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51542 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
51550 \begin_layout Subsection
51554 \begin_layout Standard
51555 The thesaurus is described in section
51556 \begin_inset space ~
51560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51562 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
51570 \begin_layout Subsection
51572 \begin_inset Index idx
51577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51584 \begin_inset Index idx
51589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51598 \begin_layout Standard
51599 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
51602 \begin_layout Subsection
51608 \begin_inset Index idx
51613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51614 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51623 \begin_layout Standard
51624 Generates with the help of the program
51626 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
51629 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
51630 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
51631 This feature is not available on Windows.
51634 \begin_layout Subsection
51640 \begin_inset Index idx
51645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51655 \begin_layout Standard
51656 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
51661 \begin_inset space ~
51666 to see the full filename paths.
51669 \begin_layout Subsection
51671 \begin_inset Index idx
51676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51685 \begin_layout Standard
51686 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
51687 files as described in section
51688 \begin_inset space ~
51692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51694 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
51702 \begin_layout Subsection
51704 \begin_inset Index idx
51709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51712 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51722 \begin_inset IndexMacro see
51725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51726 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51738 \begin_inset Index idx
51743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51744 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
51753 \begin_layout Standard
51754 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
51758 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
51759 -packages and programs it needs;
51761 \begin_inset space ~
51765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51767 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
51775 \begin_layout Subsection
51779 \begin_layout Standard
51784 dialog as described in detail in appendix
51785 \begin_inset space ~
51789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51791 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
51799 \begin_layout Section
51801 \begin_inset Index idx
51806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51808 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51825 \begin_layout Standard
51826 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
51827 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
51829 If a file is not available in this language,
51830 the English version will be listed.
51833 \begin_layout Standard
51837 \begin_inset space ~
51842 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
51843 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
51844 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
51846 \begin_inset space ~
51850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51852 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
51860 \begin_layout Standard
51864 \begin_inset space ~
51869 gives information about the copyright,
51870 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
51871 version you are using.
51874 \begin_layout Section
51876 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51878 name "sec:Toolbars"
51885 \begin_layout Standard
51886 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
51887 \begin_inset space ~
51891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51893 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
51901 \begin_layout Standard
51902 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
51903 This is described in the
51905 Additional Features
51910 \begin_layout Subsection
51912 \begin_inset Index idx
51917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51919 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
51922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51936 \begin_layout Standard
51937 \begin_inset Graphics
51938 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
51946 \begin_layout Standard
51947 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51953 \begin_layout Standard
51954 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
51958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51970 \begin_inset Note Note
51973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51974 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
51979 manual for more information.
51987 \begin_layout Standard
51988 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
51994 \begin_layout Standard
51995 \begin_inset Tabular
51996 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
51997 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
51998 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
51999 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
52001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52005 \begin_inset Graphics
52006 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
52016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52020 pull-down box for the environments
52033 \begin_layout Standard
52034 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
52040 \begin_layout Standard
52042 \begin_inset Tabular
52043 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
52044 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52045 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52046 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52047 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52070 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52100 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52107 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52130 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52137 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52146 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
52154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52160 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
52167 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52176 arg "spelling-continuously"
52184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52188 Spellcheck continuously
52194 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52211 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52217 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52224 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52247 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52254 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52277 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52307 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52337 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52339 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
52344 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52353 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52362 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
52370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52376 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52378 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52395 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52402 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
52410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52416 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52422 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52426 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52435 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52444 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
52452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52458 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52459 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
52466 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52489 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
52492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52494 \begin_inset space ~
52497 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52499 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
52505 arg "dialog-show character"
52516 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52537 Set text to noun style,
52539 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
52542 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52544 \begin_inset space ~
52547 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52549 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
52555 arg "dialog-show character"
52566 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52572 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
52575 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
52583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52588 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
52591 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52598 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52604 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
52609 arg "textstyle-apply"
52619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52624 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
52625 Format text using the current settings in the
52627 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
52629 \begin_inset space ~
52632 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
52643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52667 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
52669 \begin_inset space ~
52678 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52687 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
52695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52701 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52708 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52715 arg "tabular-insert"
52723 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52729 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52742 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
52745 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
52753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52758 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
52761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
52768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52777 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
52785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52789 Toggle outline window on/off,
52792 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
52799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52808 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
52816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52820 Toggle math toolbar on/off
52826 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52835 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
52843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52847 Toggle table toolbar on/off
52860 \begin_layout Subsection
52862 \begin_inset Index idx
52867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52869 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
52872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52886 \begin_layout Standard
52887 \begin_inset Graphics
52888 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
52896 \begin_layout Standard
52897 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52903 \begin_layout Standard
52904 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
52907 \begin_layout Standard
52908 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
52914 \begin_layout Standard
52915 \begin_inset Tabular
52916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
52917 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
52918 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52919 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
52920 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52947 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52956 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
52964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52974 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
52975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52983 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
52991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
52994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53010 arg "layout-toggle List"
53018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53028 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53037 arg "layout-toggle Description"
53045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53064 arg "depth-increment"
53072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53078 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53080 \begin_inset space ~
53084 \begin_inset space ~
53093 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53102 arg "depth-decrement"
53110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53116 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53118 \begin_inset space ~
53122 \begin_inset space ~
53131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53140 arg "float-insert figure"
53148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53154 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53155 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53171 arg "float-insert table"
53179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53186 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
53193 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53223 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53232 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
53240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53253 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53262 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
53270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53283 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53306 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53308 \begin_inset space ~
53317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53326 arg "nomencl-insert"
53334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53342 \begin_inset space ~
53351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53360 arg "footnote-insert"
53368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53390 arg "marginalnote-insert"
53398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53404 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53406 \begin_inset space ~
53415 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53438 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53439 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
53441 \begin_inset space ~
53450 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53459 arg "box-insert Frameless"
53467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53480 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53503 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53510 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53533 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53535 \begin_inset space ~
53544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53553 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
53561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53568 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
53575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53584 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
53592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
53599 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53601 \begin_inset space ~
53610 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53619 arg "dialog-show character"
53627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53633 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53635 \begin_inset space ~
53638 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
53645 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53651 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
53656 arg "textstyle-apply"
53664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53669 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
53670 Format text using the recent settings in the
53673 arg "dialog-show character"
53682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53691 arg "layout-paragraph"
53699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53705 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
53707 \begin_inset space ~
53716 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53725 arg "thesaurus-entry"
53733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53739 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
53753 \begin_layout Subsection
53754 View/Update Toolbar
53755 \begin_inset Index idx
53760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53762 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
53765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53779 \begin_layout Standard
53780 \begin_inset Graphics
53781 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
53788 \begin_layout Standard
53789 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53795 \begin_layout Standard
53796 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
53799 \begin_layout Standard
53800 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
53806 \begin_layout Standard
53807 \begin_inset Tabular
53808 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
53809 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
53810 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53811 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
53812 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53835 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53851 arg "buffer-update"
53859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53865 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53881 arg "master-buffer-view"
53889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53895 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53897 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
53899 \begin_inset space ~
53905 \begin_inset space ~
53914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53923 arg "master-buffer-update"
53931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53939 \begin_inset space ~
53943 \begin_inset space ~
53952 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53961 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
53969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53975 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53976 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53978 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
53980 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
53983 \SpecialChar menuseparator
53984 Synchronize with Output
53990 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
53991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
53994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54001 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
54011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54017 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54018 View (Other Formats)
54024 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
54025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54031 arg "update-others"
54035 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
54043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
54046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54050 Update (Other Formats)
54063 \begin_layout Standard
54065 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
54066 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
54071 \begin_layout Subsection
54075 \begin_layout Standard
54076 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
54077 \begin_inset space ~
54081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54083 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
54090 \begin_inset Index idx
54095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54097 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54114 \begin_inset space ~
54119 manual and the math macro toolbar
54120 \begin_inset Index idx
54125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54127 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54148 \begin_layout Chapter
54149 The Document Settings
54150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54152 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
54157 \begin_inset Index idx
54162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54164 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54181 \begin_layout Standard
54185 \begin_inset space ~
54190 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
54192 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
54196 You can save your document settings as default with the
54198 Save as Document Defaults
54200 button in any dialog.
54201 This will create a template named
54205 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
54206 when you create a new document without using a template.
54209 \begin_layout Standard
54214 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
54215 This affects mostly class options,
54216 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
54219 \begin_layout Standard
54220 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
54221 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
54222 To find a setting quicker,
54223 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
54225 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54229 \begin_inset space \space{}
54233 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54241 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
54242 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
54243 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
54246 \begin_layout Section
54250 \begin_layout Standard
54251 Here you set the document class,
54254 and a master document.
54255 Document classes are described in section
54256 \begin_inset space ~
54260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54262 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
54270 \begin_layout Standard
54274 \begin_inset space ~
54279 you can load you own layout-file,
54280 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
54285 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
54286 as a layout for a document class.
54287 For more about layout-files,
54290 Installing New Document Classes,
54291 Types of Layout Files
54300 \begin_layout Standard
54301 Some classes use special class options by default.
54302 If this is the case,
54303 they are listed in the field
54307 and you can decide to use them or not.
54308 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
54309 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
54314 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
54316 color and page layout packages.
54322 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54324 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
54328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54329 When you want to use one of the following drivers
54330 \begin_inset Newline newline
54344 \begin_inset Newline newline
54347 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54354 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54356 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
54369 \begin_layout Standard
54374 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
54375 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
54376 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
54377 This way child documents are always compilable.
54378 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
54385 \begin_inset space ~
54393 \begin_layout Standard
54394 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54404 \begin_inset Index idx
54409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54412 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54427 \begin_inset Index idx
54432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54435 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54449 for cross-references,
54451 \begin_inset space ~
54455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54457 reference "sec:Cross-References"
54465 \begin_layout Section
54469 \begin_layout Standard
54470 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
54471 Please refer to the section
54474 \begin_inset space ~
54482 \begin_inset space ~
54487 manual for details.
54490 \begin_layout Section
54494 \begin_layout Standard
54495 Modules are explained in section
54496 \begin_inset space ~
54500 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54502 reference "subsec:Modules"
54510 \begin_layout Section
54514 \begin_layout Standard
54516 \begin_inset space ~
54520 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54522 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
54530 \begin_layout Section
54534 \begin_layout Standard
54535 The document font settings are described in section
54536 \begin_inset space ~
54540 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54542 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
54550 \begin_layout Section
54554 \begin_layout Standard
54555 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
54567 \begin_inset space ~
54572 and whether it should be a
54575 \begin_inset space ~
54580 can also be specified here.
54583 \begin_layout Standard
54584 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
54585 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
54586 That would be impractical,
54588 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
54590 it will be as you specified in the output.
54593 \begin_layout Standard
54596 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
54599 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
54600 justifies the text on screen.
54601 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
54603 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
54607 \begin_layout Standard
54609 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
54618 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
54623 \begin_layout Section
54627 \begin_layout Standard
54628 This dialog is described in sections
54629 \begin_inset space ~
54633 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54635 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
54641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54643 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
54651 \begin_layout Section
54655 \begin_layout Standard
54656 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
54657 \begin_inset space ~
54661 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54663 reference "subsec:Margins"
54671 \begin_layout Section
54673 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54675 name "sec:Language-encodings"
54680 \begin_inset Index idx
54685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54687 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54704 \begin_layout Standard
54705 The document language and quote styles are set here.
54706 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54707 (the \SpecialChar LyX
54708 file is always encoded in utf8).
54709 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
54710 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54711 -command is not known for a particular character).
54712 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
54716 \begin_layout Standard
54718 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
54721 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
54722 files in Unicode – or utf8,
54723 for that matter (which is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
54724 's default encoding).
54725 This should normally fit your needs,
54726 since \SpecialChar LaTeX
54727 's Unicode support covers the characters of most scripts.
54728 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive,
54729 so there might be cases where using one of the traditional,
54731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
54735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
54739 encodings is necessary.
54742 \begin_layout Standard
54744 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
54746 provides support for these traditional encodings.
54749 Traditional (auto-selected)
54757 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for the given language(s).
54759 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54763 \begin_layout Standard
54765 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
54766 If you use the option
54772 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
54775 If the document contains text in more than one language you
54776 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
54779 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54782 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
54783 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
54784 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
54789 \begin_layout Standard
54791 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
54800 any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
54802 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
54806 \begin_layout Standard
54808 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
54810 you can also select
54815 which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
54816 Note that this encoding is then used for
54821 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation below).
54824 \begin_layout Standard
54826 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54828 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
54832 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
54833 Do not load inputenc
54834 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54838 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
54840 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
54842 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54844 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
54845 in the next dropdown menu
54846 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54847 does what it states:
54849 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
54851 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
54853 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
54854 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
54855 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54861 \begin_inset Index idx
54866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54868 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54873 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
54876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54878 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
54892 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
54894 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
54896 Note that this option is only available for the standard
54902 Traditional (auto-selected)
54909 \begin_layout Standard
54911 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
54913 also supports Unicode output,
54914 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
54916 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
54917 installation supports Unicode),
54918 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
54919 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54920 is quite incomplete,
54921 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
54925 (when \SpecialChar LyX
54926 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54928 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
54929 -commands is not used,
54930 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
54931 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
54932 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
54934 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
54936 Both engines support Unicode natively.
54938 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
54941 \begin_inset space ~
54950 \begin_inset space ~
54958 \begin_inset space ~
54965 \begin_inset space ~
54969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
54971 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
54977 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
54982 you might try out one of these new engines.
54987 \begin_layout Standard
54991 \begin_inset space ~
54996 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54997 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
54998 \begin_inset Quotes eld
55002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
55006 The possible settings are:
55009 \begin_layout Description
55010 Default uses the language package that is selected in
55012 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
55013 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
55017 \begin_inset space ~
55021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55023 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
55031 \begin_layout Description
55032 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
55033 In many cases this will be
55038 \begin_inset Index idx
55043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55046 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55061 If the newer package
55066 \begin_inset Index idx
55071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55074 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55088 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55089 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55090 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
55092 this package will be used instead of
55099 \begin_layout Description
55101 \begin_inset space ~
55112 would be more appropriate.
55115 \begin_layout Description
55116 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
55117 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
55121 (for German texts),
55125 \begin_inset Newline newline
55130 usepackage{ngerman}
55133 \begin_layout Description
55134 None will not use a language package.
55135 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
55138 \begin_layout Standard
55139 Here is a list with the important encodings:
55142 \begin_layout Description
55144 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
55146 \begin_inset space ~
55150 \begin_inset space ~
55154 \begin_inset space ~
55162 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55168 \begin_inset Index idx
55173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55176 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55192 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
55198 \begin_layout Description
55199 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
55200 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
55202 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
55204 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
55205 -commands are needed.
55207 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
55208 This is the same as the
55221 \begin_layout Description
55223 \begin_inset space ~
55227 \begin_inset space ~
55230 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
55233 \begin_layout Description
55235 \begin_inset space ~
55239 \begin_inset space ~
55242 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
55245 \begin_layout Description
55247 \begin_inset space ~
55250 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
55253 \begin_layout Description
55255 \begin_inset space ~
55259 \begin_inset space ~
55262 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
55263 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55264 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55267 \begin_layout Description
55269 \begin_inset space ~
55273 \begin_inset space ~
55276 8859-13) for Estonian,
55277 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55278 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
55281 \begin_layout Description
55283 \begin_inset space ~
55287 \begin_inset space ~
55290 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
55291 Latvian and Lithuanian,
55292 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
55295 \begin_layout Description
55297 \begin_inset space ~
55301 \begin_inset space ~
55305 \begin_inset space ~
55308 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
55309 \begin_inset space ~
55315 \begin_layout Description
55317 \begin_inset space ~
55321 \begin_inset space ~
55325 \begin_inset space ~
55328 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
55335 Slovak and Slovenian
55338 \begin_layout Description
55340 \begin_inset space ~
55344 \begin_inset space ~
55347 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
55348 used especially on UNIX OSes,
55349 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55350 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55351 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55352 \begin_inset space ~
55356 \begin_inset space ~
55362 \begin_layout Description
55364 \begin_inset space ~
55368 \begin_inset space ~
55371 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
55372 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
55373 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
55374 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
55375 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
55376 \begin_inset space ~
55380 \begin_inset space ~
55386 \begin_layout Description
55388 \begin_inset space ~
55392 \begin_inset space ~
55395 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
55398 \begin_layout Description
55400 \begin_inset space ~
55404 \begin_inset space ~
55407 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
55410 \begin_layout Description
55412 \begin_inset space ~
55416 \begin_inset space ~
55419 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
55422 Serbian and Ukrainian
55425 \begin_layout Description
55427 \begin_inset space ~
55430 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
55433 \begin_layout Description
55435 \begin_inset space ~
55438 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
55441 \begin_layout Description
55443 \begin_inset space ~
55447 \begin_inset space ~
55450 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
55453 \begin_layout Description
55455 \begin_inset space ~
55459 \begin_inset space ~
55465 \begin_layout Description
55467 \begin_inset space ~
55471 \begin_inset space ~
55474 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
55475 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
55478 \begin_layout Description
55480 \begin_inset space ~
55484 \begin_inset space ~
55490 \begin_layout Description
55492 \begin_inset space ~
55496 \begin_inset space ~
55499 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55500 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55506 \begin_inset Index idx
55511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55514 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55530 set the document language to
55535 \begin_layout Description
55537 \begin_inset space ~
55541 \begin_inset space ~
55544 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55545 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55552 set the document language to
55555 \begin_inset space ~
55561 \begin_layout Description
55563 \begin_inset space ~
55567 \begin_inset space ~
55570 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
55571 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55577 \begin_inset Index idx
55582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55585 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55601 set the document language to
55606 \begin_layout Description
55608 \begin_inset space ~
55612 \begin_inset space ~
55615 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
55616 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55623 set the document language to
55628 \begin_layout Description
55630 \begin_inset space ~
55634 \begin_inset space ~
55637 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
55638 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55645 set the document language to
55650 \begin_layout Description
55652 \begin_inset space ~
55655 (EUC-KR) for Korean
55658 \begin_layout Description
55660 \begin_inset space ~
55664 \begin_inset space ~
55668 \begin_inset space ~
55671 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
55673 Maltese and Turkish
55676 \begin_layout Description
55678 \begin_inset space ~
55682 \begin_inset space ~
55686 \begin_inset space ~
55689 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
55698 Romanian and Slovenian,
55699 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
55702 \begin_layout Description
55704 \begin_inset space ~
55708 \begin_inset space ~
55714 \begin_layout Description
55716 \begin_inset space ~
55720 \begin_inset space ~
55723 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
55724 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
55727 \begin_layout Description
55729 \begin_inset space ~
55733 \begin_inset space ~
55736 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55742 \begin_inset Index idx
55747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55750 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55764 (for the languages Chinese,
55765 Japanese and Korean)
55766 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
55768 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55769 with the default encoding (
55771 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55777 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
55778 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55783 \begin_layout Description
55785 \begin_inset space ~
55793 \begin_inset space ~
55796 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
55803 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55807 which use Unicode directly,
55808 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55815 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
55816 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
55818 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55821 \begin_layout Description
55823 \begin_inset space ~
55827 \begin_inset space ~
55830 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55836 \begin_inset Index idx
55841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55844 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55859 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
55865 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
55867 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
55868 This used to be more comprehensive than
55871 \begin_inset space ~
55877 but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
55882 \begin_layout Description
55884 \begin_inset space ~
55887 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55893 \begin_inset Index idx
55898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55901 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
55904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55917 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
55918 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
55919 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
55920 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
55921 with the default encoding (
55923 Unicode (utf8) [default]
55929 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
55930 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
55935 \begin_layout Description
55937 \begin_inset space ~
55941 \begin_inset space ~
55945 \begin_inset space ~
55948 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
55949 \begin_inset space ~
55955 \begin_layout Description
55957 \begin_inset space ~
55961 \begin_inset space ~
55965 \begin_inset space ~
55968 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
55983 Spanish and Swedish;
55984 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
55987 \begin_layout Description
55989 \begin_inset space ~
55993 \begin_inset space ~
55997 \begin_inset space ~
56000 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
56001 but with the Euro currency sign,
56002 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
56005 \begin_layout Section
56007 \begin_inset Index idx
56012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56014 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56029 \begin_inset Index idx
56034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56036 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56051 \begin_inset Index idx
56056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56058 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56073 \begin_inset Index idx
56078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56080 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56097 \begin_layout Standard
56098 Here you can alter the font color for the
56107 \begin_inset space ~
56113 light grey)for the background color for the
56121 \begin_inset space ~
56132 sets the color back to the default.
56135 \begin_layout Standard
56136 Clicking any button showing
56144 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
56145 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
56148 \begin_layout Standard
56153 \begin_inset space ~
56158 font color and use the option
56161 \begin_inset space ~
56166 in the document settings under
56169 \begin_inset space ~
56175 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
56176 \begin_inset space ~
56180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56182 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56190 \begin_layout Standard
56191 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
56197 \begin_layout Standard
56201 \begin_inset space ~
56210 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
56212 \begin_inset space ~
56215 Code after a forced page break:
56218 \begin_layout Itemize
56219 For the page color:
56220 \begin_inset Newline newline
56227 pagecolor{color name}
56230 \begin_layout Itemize
56231 For the text color:
56232 \begin_inset Newline newline
56242 \begin_layout Standard
56243 You are restricted to one of
56285 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
56292 \begin_inset space ~
56298 \begin_inset Newline newline
56301 If you have changed a text or background color,
56302 you can use the following names to refer to them:
56305 \begin_layout Itemize
56311 \begin_inset Newline newline
56316 page_backgroundcolor
56319 \begin_layout Itemize
56323 \begin_inset space ~
56329 \begin_inset Newline newline
56337 \begin_layout Itemize
56341 \begin_inset space ~
56347 \begin_inset Newline newline
56355 \begin_layout Itemize
56359 \begin_inset space ~
56365 \begin_inset Newline newline
56373 \begin_layout Standard
56374 To see how to define and use custom colors,
56378 \begin_inset space ~
56386 \begin_inset space ~
56394 \begin_layout Section
56396 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
56400 \begin_layout Standard
56402 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
56403 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
56404 \begin_inset space ~
56408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56410 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
56419 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar,
56420 you can set here whether changes are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
56423 \begin_layout Standard
56425 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56428 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
56431 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
56433 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
56434 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
56435 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
56438 \begin_layout Section
56442 \begin_layout Standard
56443 Here you can adjust the
56447 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
56451 as described in section
56452 \begin_inset space ~
56456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56458 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
56464 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
56468 \begin_layout Standard
56470 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
56471 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox at the bottom.
56472 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of this package can be used as well.
56473 The most common one are:
56476 \begin_layout Description
56478 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
56479 right Line numbers to the right margin
56482 \begin_layout Description
56484 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
56485 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages,
56489 \begin_layout Description
56491 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
56492 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
56495 \begin_layout Description
56497 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
56498 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
56501 \begin_layout Description
56503 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
56504 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
56507 \begin_layout Description
56509 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
56511 \begin_inset space ~
56514 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
56519 \begin_layout Section
56523 \begin_layout Standard
56524 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56530 \begin_inset Index idx
56535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56538 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56558 \begin_inset Index idx
56563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56566 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56585 \begin_inset Index idx
56590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56593 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56608 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
56612 Sectioned bibliography
56614 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56620 \begin_inset Index idx
56625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56628 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56648 you can select the style files and specify further options.
56650 you can select a document-specific
56654 for the generation of the bibliography.
56655 For a further description of these possibilities see section
56656 \begin_inset space ~
56660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56662 reference "sec:Bibliography"
56670 \begin_layout Section
56674 \begin_layout Standard
56675 Here you can define the
56679 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
56680 \begin_inset space ~
56684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56686 reference "sec:Index"
56694 \begin_layout Section
56698 \begin_layout Standard
56699 The PDF properties are explained in section
56700 \begin_inset space ~
56704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
56706 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
56714 \begin_layout Section
56718 \begin_layout Standard
56719 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
56720 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
56726 \begin_inset Index idx
56731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56734 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56754 \begin_inset Index idx
56759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56762 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56782 \begin_inset Index idx
56787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56790 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56810 \begin_inset Index idx
56815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56818 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56838 \begin_inset Index idx
56843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56846 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56866 \begin_inset Index idx
56871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56874 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56894 \begin_inset Index idx
56899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56902 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56922 \begin_inset Index idx
56927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56930 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56950 \begin_inset Index idx
56955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56977 \begin_inset Index idx
56982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
56985 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
56988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57000 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
57003 \begin_layout Description
57004 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
57005 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
57006 -errors in formulas,
57007 ensure that you have this enabled.
57010 \begin_layout Description
57011 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
57012 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
57013 -errors in formulas,
57014 ensure that you have this enabled.
57017 \begin_layout Description
57018 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
57022 \begin_inset space ~
57034 \begin_layout Description
57035 esint is used for special integral characters,
57039 \begin_inset space ~
57051 \begin_layout Description
57052 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
57064 \begin_layout Description
57065 mathtools is used for the math commands
57106 and labeled arrows,
57107 see the corresponding sections in the
57114 \begin_layout Description
57115 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
57118 Chemical Symbols and Equations
57127 \begin_layout Description
57128 stackrel is used for the math command
57146 \begin_layout Description
57147 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
57150 \begin_layout Description
57151 undertilde is used for the math command
57160 Accents for one Character
57169 \begin_layout Section
57171 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
57173 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
57179 \begin_layout Standard
57181 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
57182 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
57185 \begin_layout Standard
57187 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
57188 The float placement options
57189 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
57192 are described in the section
57195 \begin_inset space ~
57199 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
57201 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
57209 \begin_inset space ~
57217 \begin_layout Section
57221 \begin_layout Standard
57222 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
57224 Program Code Listings
57229 \begin_inset space ~
57237 \begin_layout Section
57241 \begin_layout Standard
57242 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
57251 set to be used and set the
57256 The itemize environment is described in section
57257 \begin_inset space ~
57261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57263 reference "sec:Itemize"
57271 \begin_layout Standard
57272 You can furthermore specify a
57275 \begin_inset space ~
57280 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57281 command of the desired character.
57282 For example to use the € sign,
57283 you have to insert the command
57290 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
57292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
57296 \begin_inset space \space{}
57300 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
57310 To find the command for a math symbol,
57311 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
57314 \begin_layout Standard
57315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
57318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57324 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57325 -packages in the preamble (menu
57327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
57328 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
57331 \begin_inset space ~
57337 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
57341 usepackage{textcomp}
57344 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
57348 usepackage{amssymb}
57358 \begin_layout Section
57362 \begin_layout Standard
57363 Branches are described in section
57364 \begin_inset space ~
57368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57370 reference "sec:Branches"
57378 \begin_layout Section
57380 \change_deleted 5863208 1685691759
57382 \change_inserted 5863208 1685691762
57386 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57388 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
57395 \begin_layout Standard
57396 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
57399 \begin_layout Description
57401 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57403 \begin_inset space ~
57408 Save transient properties
57410 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57411 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57415 \begin_layout Itemize
57417 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57418 the activation of change tracking
57421 \begin_layout Itemize
57423 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57424 the output of tracked changes
57427 \begin_layout Itemize
57429 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57430 the recording of the document directory path.
57433 \begin_layout Standard
57435 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692056
57436 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57440 \begin_layout Description
57442 \begin_inset space ~
57446 \begin_inset space ~
57450 The format that is used when you enter
57451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57460 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57469 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57472 View Master Document
57473 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
57480 Update Master Document
57481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
57488 menu or the toolbar.
57489 The default is set in
57491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57492 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
57494 \begin_inset space ~
57497 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
57502 \begin_inset space ~
57506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57508 reference "sec:File-Formats"
57516 \begin_layout Description
57518 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692088
57520 \begin_inset space ~
57524 \begin_inset space ~
57528 \begin_inset space ~
57531 programs If this is switched on,
57537 option which is needed with some packages.
57538 Note that this comes with security risks,
57539 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57540 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
57544 \begin_layout Description
57546 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
57548 \begin_inset space ~
57552 \begin_inset space ~
57555 Options offers settings for the
57563 \begin_layout Itemize
57567 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
57569 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
57571 \begin_inset space ~
57577 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
57579 \begin_inset space ~
57583 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
57589 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
57591 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
57592 settings for the menu
57594 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
57598 \begin_inset space ~
57602 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
57605 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
57606 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
57611 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57613 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
57615 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
57618 or a detailed description see section
57620 Reverse DVI/PDF search
57625 \begin_inset space ~
57631 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
57635 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
57639 \begin_layout Itemize
57641 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
57644 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
57646 determines whether so-called
57647 \begin_inset Quotes els
57651 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57655 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
57656 \begin_inset Quotes els
57660 \begin_inset Quotes ers
57663 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
57664 (such as sections or captions),
57665 even if the corresponding insets are placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
57667 This setting is on by default,
57668 since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
57670 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic macros,
57671 you can uncheck this.
57672 If you don't know what we are talking about here,
57674 just leave it checked.
57680 \begin_layout Description
57682 \begin_inset space ~
57686 \begin_inset space ~
57689 Options offers settings for the export format
57697 \begin_inset space ~
57702 will assure that the output follows exactly version
57703 \begin_inset space ~
57706 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
57710 \begin_inset space ~
57715 settings are described in detail in section
57717 Math Output in XHTML
57722 \begin_inset space ~
57731 \begin_inset space ~
57735 \begin_inset space ~
57740 is used for the size of equations in the output.
57741 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692496
57745 \begin_layout Description
57747 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692661
57749 \begin_inset space ~
57753 \begin_inset space ~
57756 Options offers settings for the export format
57759 The details for the options are described in the chapter
57765 Additional Features
57772 \begin_layout Description
57774 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57776 \begin_inset space ~
57781 Save transient properties
57783 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
57784 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
57788 \begin_layout Itemize
57790 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57791 the activation of change tracking
57794 \begin_layout Itemize
57796 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57797 the output of tracked changes
57800 \begin_layout Itemize
57802 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57803 the recording of the document directory path.
57806 \begin_layout Standard
57808 \change_deleted 5863208 1685692051
57809 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts)
57812 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
57817 \begin_layout Description
57819 \change_inserted 5863208 1685692091
57821 \begin_inset space ~
57825 \begin_inset space ~
57829 \begin_inset space ~
57832 programs If this is switched on,
57838 option which is needed with some packages.
57839 Note that this comes with security risks,
57840 so please use this only when really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
57845 \begin_layout Section
57853 \begin_layout Standard
57854 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
57855 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
57857 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
57859 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
57862 \begin_layout Standard
57863 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
57864 -syntax is given in section
57865 \begin_inset space ~
57869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
57871 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
57879 \begin_layout Chapter
57885 \begin_inset CommandInset label
57887 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
57892 \begin_inset Index idx
57897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57906 \begin_layout Standard
57907 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
57909 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
57913 It has the following submenus.
57916 \begin_layout Section
57920 \begin_layout Subsection
57924 \begin_layout Subsubsection
57925 User Interface File
57926 \begin_inset Index idx
57931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57933 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57948 \begin_inset Index idx
57953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57955 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
57958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
57972 \begin_layout Standard
57973 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
57974 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
57982 \begin_layout Description
57987 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
57990 \begin_layout Description
57997 the menu entries in popup context menus
58000 \begin_layout Description
58005 specifies the toolbar buttons
58008 \begin_layout Standard
58009 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
58010 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
58013 \begin_layout Standard
58014 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
58028 entries must be finished with an explicit
58058 and in the case of the
58059 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58063 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58071 The syntax for the entries is:
58074 \begin_layout Standard
58075 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58081 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58104 \begin_layout Standard
58106 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58109 All the \SpecialChar LyX
58110 -functions are listed in the menu
58112 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
58114 \begin_inset space ~
58122 \begin_layout Standard
58123 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
58129 \begin_layout Standard
58131 assuming you use the menu
58133 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
58136 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
58137 you can add the line
58140 \begin_layout Standard
58141 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58155 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58159 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58165 \begin_layout Standard
58167 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
58171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58182 to have the sixth bookmark.
58185 \begin_layout Standard
58189 \begin_inset space ~
58194 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
58195 's toolbar buttons.
58196 The currently available icon sets are compared in
58197 \begin_inset CommandInset href
58200 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
58206 \change_inserted 258250489 1697053558
58210 \begin_layout Standard
58212 \change_inserted 258250489 1697054388
58216 \begin_inset space ~
58220 \begin_inset space ~
58225 allows you to change the look and feel of \SpecialChar LyX
58226 's user interface control elements.
58227 There may be different choices available on different operating systems.
58228 On certain operating systems some styles may support dark mode while others don't.
58229 In order to use dark mode in \SpecialChar LyX
58230 you may first need to enable it in your system's settings.
58235 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58239 \begin_layout Standard
58242 Enable tool tips in main work area
58244 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
58247 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58251 \begin_layout Standard
58256 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
58257 should display in the menu
58259 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
58261 \begin_inset space ~
58267 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58271 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58273 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58277 \begin_layout Standard
58279 \change_inserted 5863208 1686648655
58280 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
58285 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
58286 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
58287 the text then appears centered.
58292 \begin_layout Subsection
58296 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58300 \begin_layout Standard
58303 Restore window layouts and geometries
58306 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58310 \begin_layout Standard
58313 Restore cursor positions
58315 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
58318 \begin_layout Standard
58321 Load opened files from last session
58323 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
58327 \begin_layout Standard
58330 Clear all session information
58332 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
58333 sessions (cursor positions,
58334 names of last opened documents,
58338 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58340 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58342 name "subsec:Backup documents"
58347 \begin_inset Index idx
58352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58354 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58371 \begin_layout Standard
58374 Backup original documents when saving
58376 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was
58377 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618729
58378 opened or when it was
58380 saved the last time.
58381 It is stored in the
58384 \begin_inset space ~
58390 \begin_inset space ~
58394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58396 reference "sec:Paths"
58401 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
58404 \begin_inset space ~
58410 The backup file has the file extension
58411 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618692
58415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58421 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618694
58425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58429 \change_inserted -712698321 1676618670
58430 and the same name than the original file.
58434 \begin_inset space ~
58440 the file has the full path in its file name,
58442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
58446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
58451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58457 !MyDir!MySubDir!Filename.lyx~
58460 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618585
58466 \begin_layout Standard
58468 \change_inserted -712698321 1676622933
58471 Make auto-save snapshots every X minutes
58474 LyX furthermore automatically saves snapshots of the current document (including unsaved changes) in the specified interval if there are unsaved changes.
58475 These files which are stored as
58479 in the document's directory are overwritten on each auto-save cycle and deleted when the document is closed normally.
58480 Should \SpecialChar LyX
58481 crash with unsaved changes and the restoration from the emergency file fail,
58482 this file can be used as a resort.
58485 \begin_layout Standard
58487 \change_inserted -712698321 1676623063
58488 Please read section
58489 \begin_inset space ~
58493 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58495 reference "sec:Safety-Nets"
58499 for more details on \SpecialChar LyX
58500 's diverse backup and safety mechanisms.
58505 \begin_layout Standard
58507 \change_deleted -712698321 1676619117
58514 you can specify the time between backup saves.
58519 \begin_layout Standard
58522 Save documents compressed by default
58524 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
58525 \begin_inset space ~
58529 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58531 reference "subsec:Compressed"
58537 This applies to newly created documents only.
58538 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
58539 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619181
58543 \begin_layout Standard
58545 \change_inserted -712698321 1676619393
58548 Save the document directory path
58550 stores the path of the document in the \SpecialChar LyX
58552 This is particularly handy if you have included files (such as graphics or child documents) which are referred to with relative paths.
58553 The option then allows moving the document elsewhere and still finding these included files if they are still in their original directories.
58558 \begin_layout Standard
58560 \change_deleted -712698321 1676618508
58561 Apart from that LyX autosaves document in regular intervals.
58562 It is used to restore unsaved changes in the document if the program crashes.
58563 The temporary file name is
58572 \begin_layout Subsubsection
58573 Windows & work area
58576 \begin_layout Standard
58579 Open documents in tabs
58582 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58586 \begin_layout Standard
58591 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
58596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58598 \begin_inset space ~
58602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58604 reference "sec:Paths"
58609 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
58618 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
58620 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
58621 instance is created for each file.
58624 \begin_layout Standard
58627 Single close-tab button
58630 there will only be one close button (
58640 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
58641 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
58642 Regardless of this option,
58643 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
58646 \begin_layout Standard
58647 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58656 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
58657 before the change takes effect.
58665 \begin_layout Standard
58670 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
58671 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
58673 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
58677 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
58678 and only want to close the view in once instance.
58681 \begin_layout Subsection
58683 \begin_inset Index idx
58688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58690 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
58707 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
58714 \begin_layout Standard
58715 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
58719 \begin_layout Standard
58720 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
58723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58729 This section only deals with the fonts
58733 the \SpecialChar LyX
58735 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
58736 and set in the menu
58738 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
58739 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
58750 \begin_layout Standard
58770 (depends on the system) as its
58773 \begin_inset space ~
58789 \begin_layout Standard
58790 You can change the font size with the
58797 \begin_layout Standard
58802 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
58804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58807 points have the size of 1
58808 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58813 \begin_inset space ~
58817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58819 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
58825 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
58826 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
58830 The sizes are explained in detail in section
58831 \begin_inset space ~
58835 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58837 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
58845 \begin_layout Subsection
58847 \begin_inset Index idx
58852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58854 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58870 \begin_inset Index idx
58875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58877 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58894 \begin_layout Standard
58895 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
58896 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
58903 \begin_layout Standard
58904 By checking the option
58908 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
58916 \begin_inset space ~
58920 \begin_inset space ~
58925 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
58928 \begin_layout Subsection
58930 \begin_inset Index idx
58935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58937 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
58940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
58954 \begin_layout Standard
58955 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
58959 \begin_layout Standard
58964 enables previewing snippets of your document.
58965 This feature is described in section
58966 \begin_inset space ~
58970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
58972 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
58980 \begin_layout Standard
58981 Checking the option
58984 \begin_inset space ~
58988 \begin_inset space ~
58992 \begin_inset space ~
58997 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
59000 \begin_layout Section
59002 \begin_inset Index idx
59007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59009 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59026 \begin_layout Subsection
59030 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59034 \begin_layout Standard
59037 Cursor follows scrollbar
59039 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
59042 \begin_layout Standard
59043 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
59044 If you set the value to zero,
59045 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
59048 \begin_layout Standard
59051 Scroll below end of document
59053 is self-explanatory.
59056 \begin_layout Standard
59057 In \SpecialChar LyX
59058 one can jump from word to word by pressing
59065 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
59067 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
59068 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
59069 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
59073 \begin_layout Standard
59075 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
59078 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
59080 is only relevant in documents that
59086 change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is (keeping
59094 markup) with this option selected.
59095 It the option is not selected,
59096 pasted text will be inserted without any markup (i.
59097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59102 \begin_inset Quotes els
59106 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59110 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
59111 dissolving from insets.
59122 \begin_inset Quotes els
59126 \begin_inset Quotes ers
59129 notwithstanding the state of this option.
59134 \begin_layout Standard
59137 Sort environments alphabetically
59139 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59142 \begin_layout Standard
59145 Group environments by their category
59147 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
59150 \begin_layout Standard
59155 options determine the editing style for math macros,
59165 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
59169 \begin_layout Standard
59171 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59174 Search drive for cited files
59176 allows \SpecialChar LyX
59177 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
59180 \begin_inset space ~
59184 \begin_inset space ~
59188 \begin_inset space ~
59192 \begin_inset space ~
59195 Content\SpecialChar ldots
59198 context menu on a citation.
59202 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
59204 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
59207 field determines the search pattern.
59209 \begin_inset space ~
59213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59215 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
59225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59227 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59231 \begin_layout Standard
59233 \change_deleted 5863208 1686648616
59234 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
59239 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
59240 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
59241 the text then appears centered.
59246 \begin_layout Subsection
59248 \begin_inset Index idx
59253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59260 \begin_inset Index idx
59265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59267 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59284 \begin_layout Standard
59289 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
59291 Several binding files are available,
59295 \begin_layout Description
59296 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
59299 \begin_layout Description
59300 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
59311 \begin_layout Description
59312 mac.bind a set of bindings for
59315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59323 \begin_layout Standard
59324 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
59330 and binding files for special languages.
59331 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
59333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59337 \begin_inset space \space{}
59341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59349 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
59350 in a certain language,
59352 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
59355 \begin_layout Standard
59356 Some binding files,
59362 only have a limited scope.
59363 When looking at the end of the file
59368 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
59371 \begin_layout Standard
59375 \begin_inset space ~
59379 \begin_inset space ~
59384 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
59387 \begin_layout Subsubsection
59389 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59391 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
59396 \begin_inset Index idx
59401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59403 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59420 \begin_layout Standard
59421 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
59422 functions and the bound shortcuts.
59423 To find functions easily,
59424 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
59426 Show key-bindings containing
59429 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
59430 Insert there for example as keyword
59431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59438 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
59439 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59443 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59448 one function can have more than one shortcut.
59449 All \SpecialChar LyX
59450 functions are also listed in the file
59455 that you will find in the
59462 \begin_layout Standard
59464 to add the shortcut
59473 select the function and press the
59478 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
59479 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
59482 \begin_layout Standard
59483 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
59484 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
59485 Function definition with “
59488 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
59490 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
59495 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
59497 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
59500 \begin_layout Standard
59501 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
59505 \begin_layout Standard
59506 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
59507 The syntax of the entries is:
59510 \begin_layout Standard
59516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
59535 \begin_layout Standard
59538 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
59539 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
59540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
59573 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
59574 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
59575 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
59576 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
59581 you needed to specify it as
59586 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
59587 you don't have to care for these specifics.
59589 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
59592 \begin_layout Subsection
59594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59596 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
59601 \begin_inset Index idx
59606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59613 \begin_inset Index idx
59618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59620 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59637 \begin_layout Standard
59638 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
59639 For the case where this is not possible,
59641 provides keyboard maps.
59644 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
59648 \begin_inset space ~
59652 \begin_inset space ~
59657 and select the keyboard map file named
59664 \begin_layout Standard
59679 you can select the first and second with
59682 arg "keymap-primary"
59688 arg "keymap-secondary"
59691 respectively or toggle between them with
59694 arg "keymap-toggle"
59700 \begin_layout Standard
59701 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59710 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
59718 \begin_layout Standard
59719 You can also specify the mouse
59721 Wheel scrolling speed
59724 The standard value is 1.0;
59725 higher values speed up the scrolling,
59726 lower ones slow it down.
59729 Middle mouse button pasting
59731 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
59734 \begin_layout Standard
59742 \begin_inset space ~
59746 \begin_inset space ~
59752 you can select a key for zooming.
59753 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
59754 the text is zoomed.
59757 \begin_layout Subsection
59761 \begin_layout Standard
59762 Input completion is described in section
59763 \begin_inset space ~
59767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59769 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
59777 \begin_layout Section
59779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
59786 \begin_inset Index idx
59791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59798 \begin_inset Index idx
59803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59805 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59822 \begin_layout Standard
59823 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
59824 are normally determined during the installation.
59825 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
59828 \begin_layout Description
59830 \begin_inset space ~
59833 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
59834 's working directory.
59835 It is the default when you
59847 \begin_inset space ~
59855 \begin_layout Description
59857 \begin_inset space ~
59860 templates This directory
59861 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
59862 contains the templates that are shown
59863 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
59864 will be opened when you use the menu
59865 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
59870 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59872 \begin_inset space ~
59876 \begin_inset space ~
59884 \begin_layout Description
59886 \begin_inset space ~
59889 files This directory
59890 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
59891 will be opened when you use the
59892 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
59893 contains the example files that are listed in
59896 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
59905 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
59907 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
59909 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
59915 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
59917 \begin_inset Newline newline
59921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
59924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59934 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
59935 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
59945 \begin_layout Description
59947 \begin_inset space ~
59951 \begin_inset Index idx
59956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59958 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
59961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
59972 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
59973 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
59974 \begin_inset space ~
59978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
59980 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
59990 will be used to save the backups.
59991 \begin_inset Newline newline
59994 Backup files have the ending
59995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
59999 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60005 \begin_layout Description
60007 \begin_inset space ~
60010 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
60011 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
60013 \begin_inset Newline newline
60021 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
60027 You can edit this file with the program
60036 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
60037 in its preferences under
60040 \begin_inset space ~
60046 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
60051 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
60053 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
60060 and \SpecialChar LyX
60061 need to be running the same time.
60062 \begin_inset Newline newline
60065 The pipe is also used for the
60071 \begin_inset space ~
60075 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60077 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
60083 \begin_inset Newline newline
60086 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
60087 Server-Pipe on Windows,
60088 you must use this pipe name:
60089 \begin_inset Newline newline
60105 \begin_layout Description
60107 \begin_inset space ~
60110 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
60113 \begin_layout Description
60115 \begin_inset space ~
60118 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
60119 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60122 \begin_layout Description
60124 \begin_inset space ~
60127 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
60132 You only need to specify it if you are using
60136 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
60137 For \SpecialChar LyX
60142 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
60145 \begin_layout Description
60147 \begin_inset space ~
60150 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
60151 When \SpecialChar LyX
60152 needs to use an external program,
60153 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
60154 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
60156 so you normally don't have to modify it.
60158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60166 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
60169 \begin_layout Description
60171 \begin_inset space ~
60174 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
60175 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
60176 code or in the document preamble.
60177 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
60178 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
60179 If files are included,
60180 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
60181 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
60183 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
60184 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
60187 \begin_layout Section
60191 \begin_layout Standard
60192 Here you can insert your
60201 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
60202 as described in section
60203 \begin_inset space ~
60207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60209 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
60215 to mark changes you make as yours.
60218 \begin_layout Section
60220 \begin_inset Index idx
60225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60227 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60242 \begin_inset Index idx
60247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60249 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60266 \begin_layout Subsection
60268 \begin_inset CommandInset label
60270 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
60277 \begin_layout Description
60279 \begin_inset space ~
60283 \begin_inset space ~
60286 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
60288 You can find its actual translation status here:
60290 \begin_inset CommandInset href
60292 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
60298 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
60302 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60304 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
60305 LaTeX Language Support
60310 \begin_layout Description
60312 \begin_inset space ~
60315 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
60316 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
60317 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
60318 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60322 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
60330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
60334 The most widespread language package is
60339 \begin_inset Index idx
60344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60347 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60362 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
60364 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
60365 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
60366 come with the alternative language package
60371 \begin_inset Index idx
60376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60379 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
60382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
60393 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
60395 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
60400 The available selections are described in section
60401 \begin_inset space ~
60405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
60407 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
60415 \begin_layout Description
60417 \begin_inset space ~
60421 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
60422 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
60423 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
60425 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
60429 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
60433 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
60435 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
60439 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
60440 that is used to switch to a different language
60441 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
60442 to start the package
60446 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
60447 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
60451 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
60452 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands,
60455 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60459 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60468 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
60476 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
60479 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
60481 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
60486 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
60504 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60505 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60513 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60518 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
60524 this setting is ignored.
60529 \begin_layout Description
60531 \begin_inset space ~
60535 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
60542 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
60543 Use this if the language switch set in
60547 needs to be explicitly ended,
60552 's alternative command
60556 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
60557 \SpecialChar allowbreak
60560 end{otherlanguage*}
60564 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
60567 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off
60568 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
60574 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60576 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the next
60580 selectlanguage{$$lang}
60586 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
60592 this setting is ignored.
60597 \begin_layout Description
60599 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60601 \begin_inset space ~
60605 \begin_inset space ~
60608 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
60611 \begin_layout Description
60613 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
60615 \begin_inset space ~
60619 \begin_inset space ~
60622 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
60628 \begin_layout Description
60630 \begin_inset space ~
60634 \begin_inset space ~
60638 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
60640 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
60643 this option is set,
60644 the languages used in the document will be added
60645 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
60648 to the document class options
60649 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
60650 rather than the language package options.
60651 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
60656 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
60657 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
60659 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
60660 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
60662 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this way
60666 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
60667 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
60676 \begin_layout Description
60678 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
60680 \begin_inset space ~
60684 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
60686 \begin_inset space ~
60690 \begin_inset space ~
60694 \begin_inset space ~
60700 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
60702 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
60705 this option is set,
60707 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
60708 the language switch defined in
60711 \begin_inset space ~
60716 is output at the beginning of the document,
60717 thereby explicitly switching to the document language.
60718 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
60719 This might be needed if you use a non-default
60722 \begin_inset space ~
60727 or if a package resets the document language.
60729 the language that is active at document start is used (this usually should be the document language).
60730 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
60731 documents start with the chosen document language.
60732 When this option is not set,
60736 \begin_inset space ~
60741 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
60743 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
60746 \begin_inset space ~
60756 \begin_layout Description
60758 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
60760 \begin_inset space ~
60764 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
60766 \begin_inset space ~
60770 \begin_inset space ~
60774 \begin_inset space ~
60780 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
60784 \begin_inset space ~
60788 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
60789 Set document language explicitly
60795 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
60797 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
60804 \begin_inset space ~
60810 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
60812 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
60816 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
60818 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
60821 the end of the document.
60822 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
60826 \begin_layout Subsubsection
60827 \paragraph_spacing single
60829 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
60835 \begin_layout Description
60837 \begin_inset space ~
60841 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
60843 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
60847 \begin_inset space ~
60851 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
60854 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
60856 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
60860 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
60863 in a language different
60864 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
60866 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
60869 the document language will be
60870 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
60871 marked (by default with a blue
60874 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
60876 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
60880 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
60884 \begin_layout Description
60886 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
60888 \begin_inset space ~
60892 \begin_inset space ~
60896 \begin_inset space ~
60901 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is switched via the operating system.
60902 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different scripts (e.
60903 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60907 English and Hebrew:
60909 switching the keyboard to Hebrew will automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well,
60915 \begin_layout Description
60917 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
60919 \begin_inset space ~
60923 \begin_inset space ~
60926 support Enables the use of languages,
60927 written from right to left (RTL),
60934 \begin_layout Description
60936 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60938 \begin_inset space ~
60942 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
60944 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
60948 \begin_inset space ~
60952 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
60953 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
60954 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
60956 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
60960 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
60962 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
60963 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g.,
60967 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
60969 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
60973 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
60978 \begin_layout Standard
60983 means that the cursor
60984 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
60985 follows the logic of the text direction,
60986 and the arrows' direction relates to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
60988 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
60992 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say,
60993 Hebrew embedded in English),
60994 the cursor starts at the right (that is,
60999 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the left.
61000 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part;
61001 right arrow in this specific case always means:
61006 in text (even if this means:
61013 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61014 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
61015 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
61016 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left scripts,
61017 since the cursor then follows a coherent
61018 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61029 \begin_layout Standard
61031 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
61037 always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
61039 in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
61040 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
61045 ) when coming from the left.
61046 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases,
61047 at the expense of the text logic.
61048 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
61049 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
61050 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
61055 \begin_layout Subsubsection
61057 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
61061 \begin_layout Description
61063 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
61065 \begin_inset space ~
61069 \begin_inset space ~
61072 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal separator alignment).
61074 the appropriate character for the current language is selected (e.
61075 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
61081 but you can also specify a specific (static) custom character here.
61084 \begin_layout Description
61086 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
61088 \begin_inset space ~
61092 \begin_inset space ~
61095 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
61101 \begin_layout Subsection
61105 \begin_layout Standard
61106 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
61107 \begin_inset space ~
61111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61113 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
61121 \begin_layout Section
61125 \begin_layout Subsection
61127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61129 name "subsec:General-output"
61136 \begin_layout Description
61138 \begin_inset space ~
61141 search Commands that will be used for the menu
61143 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
61145 \begin_inset space ~
61151 For a detailed description see section
61153 Reverse DVI/PDF search
61158 \begin_inset space ~
61166 \begin_layout Description
61168 \begin_inset space ~
61171 Options Options for the program
61175 that is used for the export format
61181 \begin_inset space ~
61185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61187 reference "subsec:Export"
61193 Possible options are listed in the
61198 \begin_inset Newline newline
61202 \begin_inset Flex URL
61205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61207 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
61217 \begin_layout Description
61219 \begin_inset space ~
61223 \begin_inset space ~
61226 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
61228 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
61229 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
61231 \begin_inset space ~
61237 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
61240 \begin_layout Description
61242 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
61244 \begin_inset space ~
61248 \begin_inset Index idx
61253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61260 \begin_inset Index idx
61265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61267 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61281 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
61282 \begin_inset Newline newline
61286 \begin_inset Flex URL
61289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61291 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
61297 \begin_inset Newline newline
61300 For example the format
61301 \begin_inset Newline newline
61305 \begin_inset Newline newline
61308 prints the date as day/month/year.
61313 \begin_layout Description
61315 \begin_inset space ~
61319 \begin_inset space ~
61322 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
61323 is allowed to overwrite on export.
61326 \begin_layout Subsection
61332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61334 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
61339 \begin_inset Index idx
61344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61346 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61364 \begin_layout Description
61366 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
61368 \begin_inset space ~
61376 \begin_inset space ~
61380 \begin_inset space ~
61383 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
61388 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
61412 are used for Cyrillic.
61413 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
61415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61428 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
61429 sets up in the background.
61430 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
61435 \begin_layout Description
61437 \begin_inset space ~
61441 \begin_inset space ~
61445 \begin_inset space ~
61449 \begin_inset space ~
61452 options They only have an effect when the program
61456 is used as DVI-viewer,
61457 read its manual to find out more.
61460 \begin_layout Standard
61461 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
61462 But before you change something,
61463 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
61466 \begin_layout Description
61468 \begin_inset space ~
61471 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography,
61473 \begin_inset space ~
61477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61479 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
61487 \begin_layout Description
61489 \begin_inset space ~
61492 generation Settings for the generation of the index,
61494 \begin_inset space ~
61498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61500 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
61508 \begin_layout Description
61510 \begin_inset space ~
61513 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature,
61515 \begin_inset space ~
61519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61521 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
61529 \begin_layout Description
61535 \begin_inset space ~
61538 command Command for the program
61540 Check\SpecialChar TeX
61543 that is described in the section
61545 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
61550 Additional Features
61555 \begin_layout Standard
61556 There are additionally the following options:
61559 \begin_layout Description
61561 \begin_inset space ~
61565 \begin_inset space ~
61569 \begin_inset space ~
61573 \begin_inset space ~
61578 \begin_inset space ~
61581 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
61583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
61597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
61600 to separate folders.
61601 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
61603 \begin_inset Index idx
61608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61615 \begin_inset Index idx
61620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61622 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
61625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61639 \begin_layout Description
61641 \begin_inset space ~
61645 \begin_inset space ~
61649 \begin_inset space ~
61653 \begin_inset space ~
61657 \begin_inset space ~
61661 \begin_inset space ~
61664 changes Removes all manually set
61670 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
61671 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
61673 \begin_inset space ~
61678 dialog when changing the document class.
61681 \begin_layout Section
61683 \begin_inset space ~
61687 \begin_inset Index idx
61692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61701 \begin_layout Subsection
61703 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61705 name "subsec:Converters"
61710 \begin_inset Index idx
61715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61724 \begin_layout Standard
61725 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
61726 You can modify converters or create new ones.
61727 To modify a converter,
61729 change the entry of the
61736 \begin_inset space ~
61741 field and press the
61746 To create a new converter,
61747 select an existing one,
61748 select a different format in the
61751 \begin_inset space ~
61761 field and press the
61768 \begin_layout Standard
61771 Converter File Cache
61778 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
61780 Maximum Age (in days
61783 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
61784 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
61787 \begin_layout Standard
61788 More about converters,
61789 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
61790 is described in the section
61801 \begin_layout Subsection
61803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61805 name "sec:File-Formats"
61810 \begin_inset Index idx
61815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61822 \begin_inset Index idx
61827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61836 \begin_layout Standard
61837 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
61847 programs that should be used for certain formats.
61850 \begin_layout Standard
61851 You can also define the
61853 Default output format
61855 that is used when you use
61859 View Master Document
61863 Update Master Document
61869 menu or the toolbar.
61872 \begin_layout Standard
61873 More about formats and their options is described in the section
61884 \begin_layout Standard
61885 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
61886 's temporary directory,
61887 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
61888 This is done by specifying a
61893 More about this is described in the section
61904 \begin_layout Chapter
61905 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61907 \begin_inset Index idx
61912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61919 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61921 name "chap:Units-available-in"
61928 \begin_layout Standard
61930 \begin_inset space ~
61934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
61936 reference "tab:Units"
61941 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
61942 and used in this documentation.
61945 \begin_layout Standard
61946 \begin_inset Float table
61953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61954 \begin_inset Caption Standard
61956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
61971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61972 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
61978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61980 \begin_inset Tabular
61981 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
61982 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
61983 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61984 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
61985 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
61987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
61996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
61999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62031 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62035 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62063 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62138 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
62142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62336 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62340 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62373 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62396 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62409 scaled point (65536
62410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
62422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62477 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
62482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62601 % of original image width
62606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
62660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
62669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62690 \begin_layout Standard
62691 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
62694 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
62701 \begin_layout Bibliography
62702 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62703 LatexCommand bibitem
62710 The \SpecialChar LyX
62713 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62716 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
62722 \begin_inset Newline newline
62726 \begin_inset Flex URL
62729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62731 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
62739 \begin_layout Bibliography
62740 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62741 LatexCommand bibitem
62742 key "latexcompanion"
62747 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
62750 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62751 Companion Second Edition.
62758 \begin_layout Bibliography
62759 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62760 LatexCommand bibitem
62766 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
62770 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
62778 \begin_layout Bibliography
62779 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62780 LatexCommand bibitem
62791 A Document Preparation System.
62799 \begin_layout Bibliography
62800 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62801 LatexCommand bibitem
62811 The \SpecialChar TeX
62819 \begin_layout Bibliography
62820 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62821 LatexCommand bibitem
62827 The \SpecialChar TeX
62829 \begin_inset Newline newline
62833 \begin_inset Flex URL
62836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62838 https://ctan.org/topic
62846 \begin_layout Bibliography
62847 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62848 LatexCommand bibitem
62854 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
62856 \begin_inset Newline newline
62860 \begin_inset Flex URL
62863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62865 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
62873 \begin_layout Bibliography
62874 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62875 LatexCommand bibitem
62882 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62884 name "Documentation"
62885 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
62892 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62896 \begin_inset Newline newline
62900 \begin_inset Flex URL
62903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62905 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
62913 \begin_layout Bibliography
62914 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62915 LatexCommand bibitem
62922 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62924 name "Documentation"
62925 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
62930 how to use the program
62932 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
62936 \begin_inset Newline newline
62940 \begin_inset Flex URL
62943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62945 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
62953 \begin_layout Bibliography
62954 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
62955 LatexCommand bibitem
62962 \begin_inset CommandInset href
62964 name "Documentation"
62965 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
62970 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
62976 \begin_inset Index idx
62981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62984 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
62987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
62999 \begin_inset Newline newline
63003 \begin_inset Flex URL
63006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63008 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
63016 \begin_layout Bibliography
63017 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63018 LatexCommand bibitem
63025 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63027 name "Documentation"
63028 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
63033 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63039 \begin_inset Index idx
63044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63047 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63062 \begin_inset Newline newline
63066 \begin_inset Flex URL
63069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63071 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
63079 \begin_layout Bibliography
63080 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63081 LatexCommand bibitem
63088 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63090 name "Documentation"
63091 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
63101 \begin_inset Newline newline
63105 \begin_inset Flex URL
63108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63110 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
63118 \begin_layout Bibliography
63119 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63120 LatexCommand bibitem
63121 key "makeindex-man"
63127 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63130 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
63140 \begin_inset Newline newline
63144 \begin_inset Flex URL
63147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63149 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
63155 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119703
63159 \begin_layout Bibliography
63161 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119754
63162 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63163 LatexCommand bibitem
63170 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63172 name "Documentation"
63173 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf"
63183 \begin_inset Newline newline
63187 \begin_inset Flex URL
63190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63192 \change_inserted -712698321 1667119749
63194 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/xindex/doc/xindex-doc.pdf
63206 \begin_layout Bibliography
63207 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63208 LatexCommand bibitem
63215 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63217 name "Documentation"
63218 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
63228 \begin_inset Newline newline
63232 \begin_inset Flex URL
63235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63237 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
63245 \begin_layout Bibliography
63246 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63247 LatexCommand bibitem
63254 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63256 name "Documentation"
63257 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
63262 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
63264 \begin_inset Newline newline
63268 \begin_inset Flex URL
63271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63273 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
63281 \begin_layout Bibliography
63282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63283 LatexCommand bibitem
63290 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63292 name "Documentation"
63293 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
63298 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63304 \begin_inset Index idx
63309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63312 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63327 \begin_inset Newline newline
63331 \begin_inset Flex URL
63334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63336 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
63344 \begin_layout Bibliography
63345 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63346 LatexCommand bibitem
63353 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63355 name "Documentation"
63356 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
63361 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63367 \begin_inset Index idx
63372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63375 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63390 \begin_inset Newline newline
63394 \begin_inset Flex URL
63397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63399 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
63407 \begin_layout Bibliography
63408 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63409 LatexCommand bibitem
63416 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63418 name "Documentation"
63419 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
63424 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63430 \begin_inset Index idx
63435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63438 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63453 \begin_inset Newline newline
63457 \begin_inset Flex URL
63460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63462 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
63470 \begin_layout Bibliography
63471 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63472 LatexCommand bibitem
63479 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63481 name "Documentation"
63482 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
63487 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63493 \begin_inset Index idx
63498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63501 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63516 \begin_inset Newline newline
63520 \begin_inset Flex URL
63523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63525 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
63533 \begin_layout Bibliography
63534 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63535 LatexCommand bibitem
63542 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63544 name "Documentation"
63545 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
63550 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63556 \begin_inset Index idx
63561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63564 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63579 \begin_inset Newline newline
63583 \begin_inset Flex URL
63586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63588 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
63596 \begin_layout Bibliography
63597 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63598 LatexCommand bibitem
63605 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63607 name "Documentation"
63608 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
63613 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63619 \begin_inset Index idx
63624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63627 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63642 \begin_inset Newline newline
63646 \begin_inset Flex URL
63649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63651 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
63659 \begin_layout Bibliography
63660 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63661 LatexCommand bibitem
63668 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63670 name "Documentation"
63671 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
63676 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63682 \begin_inset Index idx
63687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63690 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63705 \begin_inset Newline newline
63709 \begin_inset Flex URL
63712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63714 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
63722 \begin_layout Bibliography
63723 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63724 LatexCommand bibitem
63731 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63733 name "Documentation"
63734 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
63739 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
63745 \begin_inset Index idx
63750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63753 \begin_inset IndexMacro subentry
63756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63768 \begin_inset Newline newline
63772 \begin_inset Flex URL
63775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63777 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
63785 \begin_layout Bibliography
63786 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63787 LatexCommand bibitem
63794 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63797 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
63802 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63804 \begin_inset Newline newline
63808 \begin_inset Flex URL
63811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63813 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
63821 \begin_layout Bibliography
63822 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63823 LatexCommand bibitem
63830 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63833 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
63838 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63840 \begin_inset Newline newline
63844 \begin_inset Flex URL
63847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63849 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
63857 \begin_layout Bibliography
63858 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63859 LatexCommand bibitem
63866 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63869 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
63874 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63875 for Cyrillic languages:
63876 \begin_inset Newline newline
63880 \begin_inset Flex URL
63883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63885 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
63893 \begin_layout Bibliography
63894 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63895 LatexCommand bibitem
63902 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63905 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
63910 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63912 \begin_inset Newline newline
63916 \begin_inset Flex URL
63919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63921 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
63929 \begin_layout Bibliography
63930 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63931 LatexCommand bibitem
63938 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63941 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
63946 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63948 \begin_inset Newline newline
63952 \begin_inset Flex URL
63955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63957 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
63965 \begin_layout Bibliography
63966 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
63967 LatexCommand bibitem
63974 \begin_inset CommandInset href
63977 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
63982 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
63984 \begin_inset Newline newline
63988 \begin_inset Flex URL
63991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
63993 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
64001 \begin_layout Standard
64002 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
64009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64037 \begin_inset Note Note
64040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64047 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
64048 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
64056 \begin_layout Standard
64057 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
64058 LatexCommand bibtex
64059 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
64060 options "biblio/alphadin"
64067 \begin_layout Standard
64068 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
64072 \begin_layout Standard
64076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64082 pagedeclaration}[1]{
64085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64092 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
64100 \begin_inset Note Note
64103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
64104 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
64106 \begin_inset space ~
64110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
64112 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
64125 \begin_layout Standard
64126 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
64127 LatexCommand printnomenclature
64133 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
64134 LatexCommand printindex